The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutPermit M08-239 - RIVER POINT (SHELL & CORE)RIVER POINT SHELL & CORE 18300 CASCADE AV M08 -239 Parcel No.: 7888900175 Address: Suite No: 18300 CASCADE AV TUKW Value of Mechanical: 287,000.00 Type of Fire Protection: Furnace: <100K BTU >100K BTU Floor Furnace Suspended/Wall/Floor Mounted Heater Appliance Vent Repair or Addition to Heat/Refrig /Cooling System.... Air Handling Unit <10,000 CFM >10,000 CFM Evaporator Cooler Ventilation Fan connected to single duct Ventilation System Hood and Duct Incinerator: Domestic Commercial/Industrial doc: IMC-10/06 CitAbf Tukwila Tenant: Name: RIVER POINT (SHELL & CORE) Address: 18300 CASCADE AV , TUKWILA WA Contact Person: Name: BART SLOAN Address: 1020 S 344 ST , FEDERAL WAY WA Contractor: Name: S B QUALITY AIR LLC Address: 4909 ORCA DR NE , TACOMA, WA Contractor License No: SBQUAAL044MA Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Owner: Name: RIVERPOINT TWO LLC Address: 1100 OLIVE WAY #340 , SEATTLE WA MECHANICAL PERMIT EQUIPMENT TYPE AND QUANTITY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 * * continued on next page ** M08 -239 Permit Number: Issue Date: Permit Expires On: Phone: Phone: 206 779 -8144 Phone: 253 - 927 -6399 Expiration Date: 06/29/2010 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: REPLACEMENT OF EXISTING HVAC SYSTEM ADDING (14) ROOFTOP UNITS WITH ECONIMIZERS: (4) 7.5 -TON AND (10) 5 -TON FOR NORTH AND SOUTH WING SECOND FLOOR. ADDING (12) SPLIT SYSTEMS: (2) 7.5 -TON AND (10) 5 -TON WITH ECONOMIZER. M08 -239 10/06/2008 04/04/2009 Fees Collected: $2,912.75 International Mechanical Code Edition: 2006 Boiler Compressor: 0-3 HP /100,000 BTU 0 3 -15 HP /500,000 BTU 0 15 -30 HP /1,000,000 BTU.. 0 30 -50 HP/ 1,750,000 BTU.. 0 50+ HP /1,750,000 BTU 0 Fire Damper 0 Diffuser 0 Thermostat 26 Wood/Gas Stove 0 Water Heater 0 Emergency Generator 0 Other Mechanical Equipment Printed: 10 -06 -2008 Permit Center Authorized Signature: Signature: Print Name: • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us 'T V l a via m 1 Permit Number: M08 -239 Issue Date: 10/06/2008 Permit Expires On: 04/04/2009 Date: ,0 - O U I hereby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. I am authorized to sign and obtain this mechanical permit. Date: 1 1 9 - 10 'OR This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. doc: IMC - 10/06 M08 -239 Printed: 10 -06 -2008 Parcel No.: 7888900175 Address: Suite No: Tenant: 1: ** *BUILDING DEPARTMENT CONDMONS * ** • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us 18300 CASCADE AV TUKW RIVER POINT (SHELL & CORE) PERMIT CONDITIONS Permit Number: Status: Applied Date: Issue Date: M08 -239 ISSUED 09/23/2008 10/06/2008 2: No changes shall be made to the approved plans unless approved by the design professional in responsible charge and the Building Official. 3: All permits, inspection records, and approved plans shall be at the job site and available to the inspectors prior to start of any construction. These documents shall be maintained and made available until final inspection approval is granted. 4: All construction shall be done in conformance with the approved plans and the requirements of the International Building Code or International Residential Code, International Mechanical Code, Washington State Energy Code. 5: All electrical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206 - 431 - 3670). 6: VALIDITY OF PERMIT: The issuance or granting of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinances of the City of Tukwila. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of the code or other ordinances of the City of Tukwila shall not be valid. The issuance of a permit based on construction documents and other data shall not prevent the Building Official from requiring the correction of errors in the construction documents and other data. 7: ** *FIRE DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS * ** 8: The attached set of building plans have been reviewed by the Fire Prevention Bureau and are acceptable with the following concerns: 9: H.V.A.C. units rated at greater than 2,000 cfm require auto - shutdown devices. These devices shall be separately zoned in the alarm panel and local U.L. central station supervision is required. (City Ordinance #2051) 10: H.V.A.C. systems supplying air in excess of 2,000 cubic feet per minute to enclosed spaces within buildings shall be equipped with an automatic shutoff. Automatic shutoff shall be accomplished by interrupting the power source of the air- moving equipment upon detection of smoke in the main return -air duct served by such equipment. Smoke detectors shall be labeled by an approved agency for air -duct installation and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. (IMC 606.1, 606.2.1) 11: Remote indicator lights are required on all above ceiling smoke detectors. (City Ordinance #2051) 12: Duct smoke detectors shall be capable of being reset from a single point near the alarm panel. (City Ordinance #2051) 13: Duct detectors shall send a supervisory signal only upon activation. (City Ordinance #2051) 14: All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #2051) (IFC 104.2) 15: An electrical permit from the City of Tukwila Building Department Permit Center (206- 431 -3670) is required for this doc: Cond -10/06 M08 -239 Printed: 10 -06 -2008 project. • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 -431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us 16: The Tukwila Fire Department has changed keybox manufacturers, from Supra to Knox. Install a fire department Knox keybox. Contact the Tukwila Fire Prevention Office at 206 - 575 -4407 for ordering information. 17: Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (City Ordinances #2050 and #2051) 18: Any overlooked hazardous condition and/or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. 19: These plans were reviewed by Inspector 511. If you have any questions, please call Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau at (206)575 -4407. doc: Cond -10/06 * *continued on next page ** M08 -239 Printed: 10 -06 -2008 • • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us I hereby certify that I have read these conditions and will comply with them as outlined. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provision of any other work or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. doc: Cond -10/06 Date: 1 D'10 f M08 -239 Printed: 10 -06 -2008 SITE LOCATION I King Co Assessor's Tax No.: . l I 0 " 0 Site Address: t R 3 0CD c 5eCa /' A(f, raeto/.Q 14'( Suite Number: Floor: / 24- I, 2 Tenant Name: SkE It --4r- GO New New Tenant: 0 .... Yes Ei ..No Property Owners Name: OW e.E.FE b e I/O 44 e*IT Mailing Address: / / (yd p L t Vr WA Y Sl tt 34 S EAttt E )A 93> QC City State Zip CONTACT PERSON = who do we contact when your permit is ready to be issued Name: Mailing Address: E -Mail Address: MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company Name: K Q CJtG� 1 L e � Mailing Address: Contact Person: /2:r $1041 E -Mail Address: ic@ C J bq,41 ! Y . /ve r Contractor Registration Number: SE IA L (s L1 y/14 GL ARCHITECT. OF RECORD - All plans >rr stamped,by' Architec Company Name: Mailing Address: Contact Person: E -Mail Address: ENGINE OF RECORD - All plans must be wet,stamped by Engineer of Recor Company Name: Mailing Address: Contact Person: E -Mail Address: CITY OF TUKWI Community Development Department Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us MECHANICAL PERMIT APPLICATION Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. **Please Print* * 610.44/ /020 q /7/t 6r bad r /0 ZQ S O . 1 .4 1 4T 1- Q:Wpplications\Forms- Applications On Line\3 -2006 - Mechanical Permit Application.doc Revised: 4 -2006 bh Mechanical No. Project No. For office use only) Day Telephone: p706 - 7 7 9- t way cva 97003 City State Zip Fax Number: ,Rs 7'/- 02 0 7 S 1— L f:E,E,14- w4 y 91rc City State Zip Day Telephone: 779- 7/ T( Fax Number: RS73 1 0 20 - 7 e Expiration Date: cR 0/0 City Day Telephone: Fax Number: State Zip State City Day Telephone: Fax Number: Zip Page 1 of 2 Unit Type: Qty Unit Type: Qty Unit Type: Qty Boiler /Compressor: Qty Furnace <100K BTU Air Handling Unit >10,000 CFM /Z. Fire Damper 0 -3 HP /100,000 BTU Furnace >100K BTU Evaporator Cooler Diffuser 3 -15 HP /500,000 BTU Floor Furnace Ventilation Fan Connected to Single Duct Thermostat 2� 15 -30 HP /1,000,000 BTU Suspended /Wall/Floor Mounted Heater Ventilation System Wood /Gas Stove 30 -50 HP /1,750,000 BTU Appliance Vent Hood and Duct Water Heater 50+ HP /1,750,000 BTU Repair or Addition to Heat/Refrig /Cooling System Incinerator - Domestic Emergency Generator Air Handling Unit <10,000 CFM Incinerator — Comm /Ind Other Mechanical Equipment I Roo F 7a? Uv►.41 Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ 3 7, 0 60. 0 c? Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): D17 o., • u■ rrs 1) s our uJ l ti► 6 2 r rn W ) Cy►^( - �rT� r= kI R Use: Residential: New .... Replacement .... E `Commercial) New .... Replacement .... Fuel Type: Electric BUILDING OW Signature: Gas ....0 Other: t ►. t Indicate type of mechanical work being installed and the quantity below: PERMIT APP !CATION NO ES — Applicable to all permits in Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review — Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The Building Official may grant one or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding 90 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 105.3.2 International Building Code (current edition). I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. Print Name: -- 8A T T: Mailing Address: td C 'SO , 34 47k �+ Date Application Accepted: oatizq Q:\Applications\Forms- Applications On Line \3 -2006 - Mechanical Permit Application.doc Revised: 4 -2006 bh Dp 1 N (_.. IL 3 pLrr S YS7rIttr 2 - 1'5 t9 I0-57 W /Er_DAI/14t2a Date: 9 — �` — d � Day Telephone: ?O - 779" L4 .Ei)EkA L Wa WA, 4rco3 City State Zip Date Application Expires: Staff Initials: Page 2 of 2 i City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 -431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us RECEIPT Parcel No.: 7888900175 Permit Number: M08 -239 Address: 18300 CASCADE AV TUKW Status: APPROVED Suite No: Applied Date: 09/23/2008 Applicant: RIVER POINT (SHELL & CORE) Issue Date: Receipt No.: R08 -03446 Initials: WER User ID: 1655 Payee: SB QUALITY AIR TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Descriptio Amount Payment Check 10908 2,330.20 ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description MECHANICAL - NONRES Account Code Current Pmts 000.322.102.00.0 2,330.20 Total: $2,330.20 Payment Amount: $2,330.20 Payment Date: 10/06/2008 11:07 AM Balance: $0.00 C17 :7.!/c.6 '2707 77Tgqi 273" doc: Receipt-06 Printed: 10 -06 -2008 Receipt No.: R08 -03335 Payee: SB QUALITY AIR, LLC ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description rinr RPr int -(lf PLAN CHECK - NONRES City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 -431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Payment Check 10863 582.55 TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Descriptio Amount RECEIPT Parcel No.: 7888900175 Permit Number: M08 -239 Address: 18300 CASCADE AV TUICW Status: PENDING Suite No: Applied Date: 09/23/2008 Applicant: RIVER POINT (SHELL & CORE) Issue Date: Initials: JEM Payment Date: 09/23/2008 02:41 PM User ID: 1165 Balance: $2,330.20 Account Code Current Pmts 000/345.830 582.55 Total: $582.55 Payment Amount: $582.55 -7 27 , ^9 `23 ( "07 TMTAI Printarl• (14- 2:1 -2f(1R Project, Type of Inspection: Address: / g 3 do N•- SlpAde 4 ii Date Called: Special Instructions: Kr!/eg P .S*° // . Date Wanted: 3 -11- 4°11 a. rr . p.m. Requester: Phone No: --q7 ..266 7Z // INSPE ION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 2k Approved per applicable codes. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit COMMENTS:(i) JrMc 5 Aw-f ,&j.1,11 - �PP OW 1 1 � / Vn$1 a0 7// -2'11!4 .� I ri $60 pai ector: 1 Date: ,�— /1- dl EINSPECTION FEE RE a 9. Prior to inspection, fee must be 300 Southcenter Blvd., ite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. IRE Receip o.: 'Date: Corrections required prior to approval. S COMMENTS: Aq ° ?A -7--,7,7- 1 -3, ZC ?f 2S 2 .4, 17 1 11 1 D ? 7 3J I II tI 14 ' 12 IA to , 3( II ( Al k 9 9�5 3',450,-,-4 s � 4h, .46 S"Z s 3 .i s� 5-14,4(7,-ace, *4 k. - 9s, -9 i 1? 33 4 4 43 4 + 3L Ai\ ° jktn S t / 'SAWn froPert - r i M PrT_ 5,4 Phone No e,6 —7c9e3 - 7272. 6i.A ,` (A In AAA S u pmts 1lA kik r._ or..•�, 5 M-i f S (-,r 0 /-. L) l r5 -I OA r e Tue. Ale 5A.i ,C ee s :-\.0•A4( A Cro--,� es AIR. b N 1.-/■.P .1 ,, _,), iii t , t e- -S (i. d ° (e •Zr ,M n ALAJ U.A.! C- 0 l e>,5 ti I fl' 4 l` P,.i\' `t`D f [ () 0 plik, Project I v 'i PQ, Type of�ln�� ection: Addr s: / 3Do erg _7 delU Date Called: Special Instructions: 0—e- MkrSt,P\ r.`T j e & ; tom ('e R J A`� for P (( �'°C1 G��^ fl"e,\ cp °1nr a, roo {Ai Date Wanted: /-- G -D Requester: Phone No e,6 —7c9e3 - 7272. -145- INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit 4g — 235 INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION e. 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 =3670 ❑ Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. • Inspeor: 'Date: -U9 n $60.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: I D ate:Rali" S COMMENTS: Type of a i�n : /�P` P� � Address: G(4 Date Called: R 5 (-r I (l' -- Sp Instructions: o -01 D21 D7 6r, S `� 10 -- i AAA - , Date Wanted: Sa r 6 ' 7) -- - 7(V - ')Z Phone No ?,53' 944 —0422 1(. -..se 6 . - c d`p1`, (4,1,,e. fQ -S .P. . .. 1 . e . 0 --e Pk-So, .. ASS- -- ProJ� t,: au Po G cr .• s ke-1 Type of a i�n : /�P` P� � Address: G(4 Date Called: Sp Instructions: o -01 D21 D7 6r, S `� 10 -- i AAA - , Date Wanted: -4 `U p.m. Requester: Phone No ?,53' 944 —0422 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, WA 98188 I M0 '239 Ei Approved per applicable codes. ❑ Corrections required prior to approval. � � � Inspector: 4 Q Date: El $60.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. 'Receipt No.: 'Date: PERMIT NO. (206)431 -367 Projec J P r ( Type of Inspectio \ Address: 1 83 GQ s (e Aut Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: a.m. 1t l3 (1 Requester: Phone No. ' 647-1 0 Approved per applicable codes. M OW - ? 3 ` .INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -36X0 Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: k JJ — s� Inspect:: 'Date: 3 ❑ $60.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUII ED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: 'Date: 10 Projec . Type of Ins ection: A/ rem 2 A lI Instructions: Date Called: Special Date Wanted: U / Q —441 p.m. Requester: Phone No: 3 7V0 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 7 -2.35 PERMIT NO. r (206)431 -3670 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: /4 Q4 El $60.00 REINSPECTION FEE R QUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: 'Date: Project: p,'vt a itl, ,sit Coo. e ev •Type of Inspection: 14 vs C Address: /$3 c+' Ccrfc‘Pc. Pi`t° Suite #: Contact Person: Special Instructions: Phone No.: Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: 1 -. - e FiresAlarm: - - Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire; Permits: " Occupancy Type: a INSPECTION NUMBER 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206 -575 =4407 CITY OF TUKNVILA FIRE DEPARTMENT MA pproved per applicable codes. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc • 1/13/06 PERMIT NUMBERS Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: noreee. d4i I 41,4G Li rs d's I J ND Of�57 Jul iPeA a v► 5 t,s2 r rte. '` F ' . ( ) , '7 i/ /3 /,•ri7 Alv -th w,o 2 9 3 3 S; 31 ;q 41) 2 NO r T " " - F . . , _ . �` _ Nv »c-. 1 3 4 1 gam. r eats. A) / -r ' I Inspector: • 't in Date: 3poipty Hrs.: $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive arr invoice from e City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 Project: i , ✓et , f . r # c c, f c- /�,- Type of Inspection: h V4c /4/J Hood & Duct: Address: j t'3 C'0 Suite #: c c? 4 d-c_ Contact Person: $"c -t, Special Instructions: Phone No.: 206 - 7$ b — 91 72 Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Ararm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire; Permits: ,...P�� Type: Ocdi Ype: 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila,. Wa. 98188 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Rein a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT Approved per applicable codes. oi _r tj "OR -'219 PERMIT NUMBERS 206 -575 -4407 Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 0 M t/e"t .. /S14/ c r/l 11, -"/- gy p i 'M S #- 3 4.r c 4/1;.2. f /. Via: f2t 1 L+✓. Lt 3 JD 5 t, Ge - r,- t thee?? p., j r f , 147 ze Aid 4tit ex, ✓ YL (4. G J fu4 -' 1.11 - {f , I ,Vo, cv , J Pt44I y I S-r f14 N 1vt 14 4d r t i err4 7Nn Inspector: ..5"/ aW / /qoy Hrs.: $80.00 REINSPECTI©N FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila F wtment. Call to schedule a reinspection. ,9 cc 1 C' <.,. f - 3$ - Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc 1/13/06 Project: 121 keit in} C for* `L c.c.+ Type of Inspection: ://a)r Address: Jr' Suite #: c A 5? + c Contact Person: ,/ Special Instructions: , Phone No.: Monitor: Needs Shift Inspection: , - Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood w& Dot: t } Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: F . 4 Occupancy Type: INSPECTION NUMBER CITY 444 Andover Park East, T i roved per applicable codes. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE the City of Tukwila Finance Department Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc toy' - f- " yr10 PERMIT NUMBERS FIRE DEPARTMENT Wa. 98188 206- 575 -4407 Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: C e 1''C etd j vrts4* ' 7- 1, y f sac y� ZniP / 2 c2 f � ! 41, M 614- 2w0 4e ,.f 4 7 .v �;7 .5 t! Na z : TA IVi er Hrs.: UIRED. You will receive an invoice from Call to schedule a reinspection. T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 • • • structural calculations for: riverpointe corporate center — rooftop REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED mechanical units � OCT 02 3008 18200 —18300 cascade avenue south B I D N DIVISION ��Tukwila Tukwila washington client: sb quality air 22 april 2008 index: dc- design criteria mc- support for rooftop mechanical sk- sketched framing plans and details giraf design 117 w mercer street suite 210 seattle wa 98119 -3953 (206) 621 -0060 p (206) 621 -0061 f girafdesiq n(o?gmail. com F LE COPY Prsrrnifk 9�iz�o EXPIRES 01/07/07 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA SEP 2 3 2008 PERMIT CENTER AAN • . " • . ' • • . • RETURN SUPPLY 23 I 7/8' • • tiverpoint nit Dimensions - Packaged Heat Pump Units Item: Al - A3 Qty: 7 Tag(s): HP -1, HP -2, HP-3, HP-4, HP-5, HP-6, HP -7 35/8'-1 4' RETURN SUPPLY 4 • 3218' 4 1/8' EVAPORATOR SECTION ACCESS PANEL CONDENSATE DRAIN (ALT) 314 " -14 NPT DAL. HOLE 171/7 00 275/8' 41/2' 9 718' THROUGH THE BASE CONDENSATE DOWN FLOW- PENETRATION 275/6' 47 7/8" 171/7 191/4' 88 5/8' HORIZONTAL - PENETRATION 578' 5 " 93/8" 163/4" ONTROL AND COMPRESSOR ACCESS PANEL 2° ELECTRICAL CONNECTION (SINGLE POINT POWER WHEN HEAT INSTALLED) ISOMETRIC- PACKAGED HEAT PUMP 2 3/4° 32114' A 43/4" UNIT HEIGHT 16 - 7.5 TONS STANDARD HIGH EFFICIENCY 110 TON STANDARD EFFICIENCY J uu 1 407/8' 1 146 7/8" 1 (181/2" 1 1 2412" 1 THROUGH THE BASE ELECTRICAL 3 7/8' 33/4' TOP PANEL B ONDENSER FAN NDENSER COIL NIT CONTROL WIRE 7/8' DIAL HOLE ERVICE GAUGE PORT ACCESS 1 3/8" DIA. HOLE NIT POWER WIRE AIR FLOW I RIGHT - PACKAGED HEAT PUMP April 11, 2008 Agi HORIZONT AIR FLOW v (U APoiAvfiE. I ACCESSORY II wEI I I ECONOMIZER I I 36.0 lb I MOTORIZED OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER I I N/A I I MANUAL OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER I WA I I BAROMETRIC RELIEF I N/A I OVERSIZED MOTOR I I WA BELT DRIVE MOTOR I N/A POWER EXHAUST I WA I HEATER 1 30.003 I I THROUGHT THE BASE ELECTRICAL (FIOPS) I N/A I I UNIT MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKER (FIOPS) I N/A I I UNIT MOUNTED DISCONNECT (FIOPS) I WA I I POWERED CONVENIENCE OUTLET (FIOPS) I I WA I I HINGED DOORS (FIOPS) I I N/A I I HAIL GUARD I I N/A I I SMOKE DETECTOR. SUPPLY / RETURN 1 17.0 lb I I ROOF CURB 11 115.0 m I II I II I BASIC UNIT WEIGHTS CORNER WEIGHTS CENTER OF GRAVI IY I SHIPPING NET I OA 228.0 m © 114.0 m (E) LENGHT (F) WIDTH I 825.0 m 682.0 m O 177.0 @ © 1s3.o m 38' 24" I • • Riverpoint Weight, Clearance & Rigging Diagram - 3-5 Ton R-410 Packaged Heat Pump Item: B1 Qty: 3 Tag(s): HP-8, HP -9, HP -10 • OJ IT �I l CORNER WEIGHT NOTE 1. CORNER WEIGHTS ARE GIVEN FOR INFORMATION ONLY. 2. TO ESTIMATE SHIPPING WEIGHT ADD 5 LBS TO NET WEIGHT. 3. BASIC UNIT WEIGHT DOES NOT INCLUDE ACCESSORY WEIGHT. TO OBTAIN TOTAL WEIGHT, ADD ACCESSORY NET WEIGHT TO BASIC UNIT WEIGHT. 4. WEIGHTS FOR OPTIONS NOT LISTED ARE >5 LBS. RIGGING AND CENTER OF GRAVITY INSTALLED ACCESSORIES NET WEIGHT DATA April 11, 200 6 u-Nir t(0'6 *P E 070 * C�I Vfo/NTE VG -2- ACCESSORY WEIGHTS I ECONOMIZER 36.0 lb I I MOTORIZED OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER I MANUAL OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER I BAROMETRIC RELIEF 10.0 lb I OVERSIZED MOTOR I BELT DRNE MOTOR POWER EXHAUST I I HEATER 30.0 m I I THROUGHT THE BASE ELECTRICAL (FIOPS) 1 I UNIT MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKER (FIOPS) I I UNIT MOUNTED DISCONNECT (FIOPS) I POWERED CONVENIENCE OUTLET (FIOPS) I HINGED DOORS (HOPS) I HAIL GUARD I SMOKE DETECTOR, RETURN AND /OR SUPPLY I ROOF CURB 115.0 m I I I I 1 I BASIC UNIT WEIGHTS CORNER WEIGHTS CENTER OF GRAVITIY I I SHIPPING NET O 272.0 lb © 137.0 m (E) LENGHT (F) WIDTH I 937.0 lb 794.0 lb O 200.0 lb © 185.0113 38° 22" Riverpoint Weight, Clearance & Rigging Diagram - Packaged Heat Pump Units Item: Al Qty: 2 Tag(s): HP -1, HP -2 • - • • CORNER WEIGHT INSTALLED ACCESSORIES NET WEIGHT DATA April 11, 2008 NOTE 1. CORNER WEIGHTS ARE GIVEN FOR INFORMATION. ONLY. 2. TO ESTIMATE SHIPPING WEIGHT ADD 5 LBS TO NET WEIGHT. 3. BASIC UNIT WEIGHT DOES NOT INCLUDE ACCESSORY WEIGHT. TO OBTAIN TOTAL WEIGHT, ADD ACCESSORY NET WEIGHT TO BASIC UNIT WEIGHT. • 4. WEIGHTS FOR OPTIONS NOT LISTED ARE >5 LBS. RIGGING AND CENTER OF GRAVITY - r 4 $ UNIT -F 19 1 # I t -Ctc,5 A 2r7 1 rr NO.0 vive LOItia JP? PA v cot-o - rtA`c- 1et9" T r 1 /Ne W Ar21 >? '►NS . t q , %,P-,c • 1 16tu;I 1 �i1 % 7,4v Mkotir .5 t . V D-eA4(L*t IA giraf design 117 w mercer street #210 seattle wa 98119 -3953 (206) 621 -0060 p (206) 621 -0061 f QirafdesignOgmail.com ict‘rtioz, eitiwGYU2t� 2 - C e. c . li LIZ f -€ W V°1- I;W511 � — 4x is g'o,c . — •F SFi t s Div* -i 4 i\ - (0 Z V/-z-- G U+' - PF 24p- Yq- ��vt?ti tq.3(QFr ,�• �� v 3. I 870 = lit'3Pr . . ✓ V - l , '/ I11, 1-/-110 ✓ N Low r(F.GN ro tr" *r K4,t »i - Nw Project: (a IV f go/N'r 10y -f i -Tr C C rit dient: h 4 Mg- VIN IT* rt n d` .F s f-[1NiHirt, lM& 'r e v Ai 4-Gip S , aa V INUat iNt, L pz6F.64. ir q8 � date: 4 -7-(_ o proj #: sheet: P-t - ► t1 i2 - t t,28fir . • • 'd vHrNti tove4L oNir 9.1.4 j lito Pl, v- 4' Fir ,2(Fr,r.. V- .Zl 4x4 w = /01#/11 AG .1- .50 << = I,4pr• . V = , (k, x43 . ad giraf design 117 w mercer street #210 Seattle wa 98119 -3953 (206) 621-0060 p (206) 621 -0061 f girafdesignAgmail.com ® L72 , 48 207 207 God 1?v 0)0 Q� 1Q 9 4'U 137 project: Av -e0/14rE teiGeoll-A eiffrtre1 dient: lj$ 4/411.1%x*/ kln. f)( a- ()A►r cote.5 207 Z0 7 date: 4 -Z (-o 8 proj #: sheet: HC- y () zx \zoo Jotter 2q - "c3 • -refP►G ('') 4 t z li' PI 6A ( ) 1 /9 , x 25Vz, tA3 � '- P gut c, • (F;i GdtrUF1tJ 1%5 4∎1 l UGH f L 1-4K1 =1■ HA-1 01' 4x4 l�Uh 4 (bFlL-t ) (9F(c.i) • 1-1U 4S VULL.- NA{140(i t7 ri lti p 4trte,oiJ 5 rtzow Pv*/ciwrto") ioti 4 - tt - t CT A ccoOillue tw ri A , t -1 *Hro 19M74u5 . W / LvNSr - P- C1Cxronl �, tF j►v . giraf design 117 w mercer street #210 seatde wa 98119 -3953 (206) 621 -0060 p (206) 621 -0061 f girafdesignOgmail.com project: jr1V . ro,N -E Cof-fo tE G■e.. dient: ' epu `rY k1 �L date: 4 -ZI -oB proj #: sheet: - (5) 5.ic't-F.z toL w (5) (1-00F ge tJ :ik-) 1%1 v c,• `i -f (' • ( 12)ef-x _ fu giraf design 117 w mercer street #210 seattle wa 98119 -3953 (206) 621 -0060 p (206) 621 -0061 f girafdesign(agmail.com project: 'F-lk . 0/1- client: 4trnt1(i ' A-Ig X) feoF s K A-r ANC � :„Lot J 4 I GWNN . TD CPU g' U i . Zx _ E { C � 4-x._ w/ + /q-" x - Ye @ I VO . C . ( 1N (`L (260Jc, o1 ore, s� ors Zs. 0i) k0 O'L . C 0, twa :4-f plEck CPC, Fele r-ti fc 7x4 l2 1,C, w( C 1 /4 - "ef) yam" .' — 9P- (U,4iv4 0.)5 - G't�'�. OiIJ �l Z 1Z 65 Pi rayu 6u/ f-4 - (2) cam,5 c") 1- 4 l'/z"= II -v" date: k, ZI —Oa proj #: sheet: • • 4 - 17 -2008 8:07AM FROM SB QUALITY AIR 206 927 6091 5 lob*. - 1Zl5Gf Vw \* r aoo7- so jlm�T 3 1oa r∎ �s ‘c iiNzs T ease Catt rne. g 0204- 71 / - Ti 1-14 --CCANvA1Ps l 04,1,11. . .. i ... . • km% 1 & lit , - ? I 14kiv s .■C»" � coma t OC e1O, 1ro' Q F %ti.ID1r1(r, OAST 4.•D WFsr St DE 1. lOt9► . '/X (,Z,, 17 1 _. $4.Id4,. P_ 2 1 11 182 GRANITE ST, SUITE 101 PHONE (909) 278 -1830 E —MAIL• confab@canfab.com RECEIVED C ITY OF TUKWILA SFP 2 3 2008 PERMIT CENTER INSTALLATION N F MIXING BOX WIRE HARNESS RICA i 0 CORONA, CA 92879 0 FAX: (909) 278 -8444 0 WEB: www.canfab.com TYPICAL MIXING FAN COIL - i < le- L) MIXED AIR SENSOR ' • - ACCESS - PANEL — DAMPER ACTUATOR AND ECONOMIZER LOGIC OX INSTALLATION FOR: CUSTOM MIXING BOXES PART NO: SEE BELOW RETURN AIR DUCT PARTS UST MIXING BOK (1) MIXING BOX (1) ELECTRO / MECHANICAL ECONOMIZER CONTROL INSTALLED IN MIXING BOX (1) R8222D HEAT PUMP RELAY SHIPPED WIRE TIED TO HARNESS AT ECONOMIZER (1) NECOHARNESS — WIRING HARNESS CONNECTED TO ECONOMIZER CONTROL (1) TE- 901 -7046 — -MIXED AIR SENSOR FOR DRYBULB ECONOMIZERS (1) C7650A1001 — OUTSIDE AIR DRYBULB SENSOR FOR REFERENCE ENTHALPY ECONOMIZERS (1) C7400A1004 — OUTSIDE MR ENTHALPY SENSOR FOR COMPARATIVE ENTHALPY ECONOMIZERS (2) C7400A1004 — OUTSIDE AIR & RETURN AIR ENTHALPY SENSORS OUTSIDE AIR DUCT . * s ■ OUTSIDE AIR SENSOR • RETURN AIR SENSOR RETURN AIR DAMPER NORMALY OPEN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER NORAMLY CLOSED LOGIC MODULE 1 — STANDARD MIXING BOX WITH TOP RETURN AND BACK OUTSIDE AIR SHOWN, STYLE A, TYPE OUT SPECIFYING wrtpf HONEYWELL DAMPER LOCATION AND DRYBULB THIS CONFIGURATION. VE CONFIGURATION AND CONTROL TYPE WITH ORDER. . • 2 — DAMPER IbENT1FICATION: WITH POWER OFF, RETURN AIR DAMPER WILL BE FULLY OPEN, OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER WILL BE FULLY CLOSED. OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER WILL HAVE BLADE EDGE SEALS AND SIDE SEALS FOR LOW LEAKAGE. 3 — CONTROLS: UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE, ECONOMIZER CONTROLLER WILL BE HONEYWELL W7212A1009. ACTUATOR MAY BE HONEYWELL M7215M008, MS7510A2206 OR BEUMO LF24SR —S —US. ACTUATOR MAY BE CRANK ARM DRIVE OR DIRECT DRIVE. DOC: 01 -02 hist Economizer Model Number: BAYECON085A BAYECON086A BAYECON087A BAYECON088A May 2007 e Used With: T* CO36 -060A* R TSC/YSCO36E *R THCO33- 063A *R Y *CO36 -060A* R T *CO36- 060A *E Y *CO36- 060A *E THC/YHCO36E *E TSC/YSCO36E -060E* E T *C072- 120A *R THC/YHC048 -060E* R Y *C072- 120A *R WSC060E *R WSC072 -120A* R T *C072- 120A *E Y *C072- 120A *E THC/YHC048 -060E * E REVIEWED FOR -- CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED OCT 0 3 20, � h City Of Tukwila B ILDING Drn I, YHCO33 -063A* R WSCO36 -060A* R WSCO36E -048E * R THC/YHCO36E *R TSC072- 120E *R YSC072- 120E *R TSC072- 120E *E YSC072- 120E *E CITY RECEIVED SEP 2 3 ?Mil PERMIT CENTER ACC- SVN44C -EN M01.- �3°I Hazard Identification Warnings and Cautions appear at appropriate sections throughout this manual. Read these carefully. &WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. &CAUTION - Indicates'a potentially hazardous situation;which,' if nottairoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices. CAUTION Indicates a situation thay,result in equipment a m nt or property damage only accidents. NI6'd`e1rNuryrher Description All products are identified by a multiple= chpSacter model number that'p)ecisely identifies a particular __type of lu i4/operator, I s iird will enable the "owner /operator, installing contractors, and service engineers to define the operation, specific components, and other options for any specific unit. When ordering replacement parts or requesting service, be sure to refer to the specific model number and serial number printed on the unit nameplate. Installation - Field Installed Note: This instruction covers installation of BAYECON085A, BAYECON086A (T/Y033 -063 units) , (W036 -060 units, except T/YH C048- 060E, and WSC060E *R) and BAYECON087A, BAYECON088A (T/ W/Y072 -120, T/YHC048 -060E and WSC060E *R units) Uncrate the economizer and locate all parts shown in Figure 1.. - "S)g Installation Parts List • 1 - Economizer Assembly • 10 - Screws (T/Y033 -063 units), (W036 -060 units, except for T/ YHC048 -060E, and WSC060E *R) • 12 - Screws (T/W/Y072 -120, T/ YHC048 -060E and WSC060E *R units) • 1 - Sensor; Thermistor • 1 - Grommet • 1 - Tie; Wire 1 - Barometric Duct Blockoff Plate &WARNING Hazardous Voltage! Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Each economizer ships with items 1, 2 and 3 attached. Remove screws completely from items 1 and 2. Remove item 3 by loosening the 3 screws but do not remove them. Refer to Figure 1. Figure 1. ECONOMIZER SHIPS WRH rrEMS 1, 2, & 3 ATTACHED. REMOVE SCREWS AND DISASSEMBLE ITEMS 1 & 2. REMOVE 'REM 3 BY BACKING THE THREE SCREWS OUT (DO NOT REMOVE SCREWS). Figure 2. Remove unit end panel, retain the screws removed from the top of panel and the screws removed from bottom of panel for use later. Downflow Installation For Downflow Installation, assemble end panel to the economizer. Refer to Figure 2 . ALIGN (3)TABS ON BRACKET WITH (3)SLOTS IN PANEL PIVOT INTO PLACE AND SECURE WITH THREE SCREWS ENGAGED INTO ECONOMIZER SIDE PANEL. ALIGN (3)SLOTS IN PANEL WITH (3)TABS ON ECONOMIZER SIDE PANEL PIVOT PANEL INTO PLACE ACC-SVN44C-EN Installation Horizontal Installation For Horizontal Installation, assemble end panel to the economizer. Refer to Figure 3 for disassembly instructions of the downflow configuration. Figure 3. FOR FIELD INSTALLATION, II I ASSEMBLE IN PANEL BEFORE CONVERTING TO ii i / � I / PO Al 10 k ow 41 REMOVE NUT AND DISASSEMBLE LINKAGE CUT SIDEWALL (TWO PLACES) Refer to Figure 4 for reassembly instructions to Horizontal configuration. Figure 4. SECURE RETURN AIR DAMPER BLADE ASSEMBLY TO SIDE PANEL WITH 2 SCREWS SECURE RETURN AIR DAMPER BLADE ASSEMBLY TO REAR PANEL WITH 2 SCREWS ACC- SVN44C -EN REMOVE TWO SCREWS TO DISASSEMBLE LINKAGE BRACKET. REMOVE SIX SCREWS TO DISASSEMBLE RETURN AIR BLADE ASSEMBLY FROM ECONOMIZER. SHIPPING LOCATION OF HORIZONTAL LINKAGE ROD. AFTER CUTTING SIDE WALLS, SNAP THIS PIECE APART FROM MAIN BLADE AND DISCARD. * *FOR HORIZONTAL APPLICATIONS ONLY** CONNECT ROD TO BALL JOINT. DO NOT ALLOW MORE THAN .25" (6.25MM) OF ROD TO PROTRUDE THROUGH BALL JOINT. IF UNIT HAS A FIOP SMOKE DETECTOR, REMOVE THIS KNOCKOUT TO ALLOW CLEARANCE FOR THE SMOKE DETECTOR TUBE Optional Sensors (ReliaTel Only) If the optional sensors for humidity and temperature monitoring are to be used (BAYENTHOO5A and BAYENTHOO6A), install them now. Use the instructions provided in the kits.) Blockoff Asssembly The return duct blockoff plate(S) must be installed prior to the installation of the economizer in the unit. Refer to Figure 6 for installation in units without Return Air Smoke Detector. If the unit has a Return Air Smoke Detector, refer to Figure 6 for installation. Note: If either Power Exhaust or Barometric Relief Accessory kits are installed along with an Economizer, do not install the duct blockoff plate. Figure 5. HORIZONTAL APPLICATIONS, DISCARD BLOCKOFF PLATE DOWNFLOW APPLICATIONS: ASSEMBLE DUCT BLOCKOFF PLATE BEFORE INSTALLING ECONOMIZER. FLANGE IS DOWN IF THERE IS NO SMOKE DETECTOR. Note: If Power Exhaust or Barometie Relief accessory kits are Installed along with an Economiser, do not Install duct blockoff plate. 3 Figure 6. Note: On (T/W/Y -120, T/ YHC048 -060E and WSC060E units) Downflow units only, install return air blockoff. See Figure 6. To install the economizer, lift into position by fitting the upper left hand corner around the channel in the cabinet post. Then pivot the economizer into the opening in the cabinet. Refer to Figure 7. Once the economizer is in place, lift the economizer and panel assembly to align the upper two screw holes. Secure the top by inserting 2 screws, top left 1 then top right 2 screws. Pull out on the bottom of the economizer and secure bottom left 3 screws. Remove the filter access panel. Position the adapter backing plate inside the filter section. The adapter backing plate will slip over the 3 screws that were loosened in figure 1. Align the screw engagement hole in the adapter backing plate, with the screw clearance hole in panel and secure lower right side of economizer with screw 4. Install the bottom blockoff and secure with 3 screws. 4 ASSEMBLE DUCT BLOCKOFF PLATE BEFORE INSTALLING ECONOMIZER. FLANGE IS UP IF THERE IS A SMOKE DETECTOR, REMOVE KNOCKOUT IN BLOCKOFF PLATE TO ALLOW CLEARANCE FOR SMOKE DETECTOR TUBE. Note: If Power Exhaust or Barometic Relief accessory kits are installed along with an Economizer, do not install duct blockoff plate. Figure 7. T /v / /072 DN.7' ASSEMBLE RETURN AIR BLOCKDFF Install the Mixed Air Sensor with grommet, secure with pop -in wire tie. Connect to exiting jumper connections located in the Indoor Fan Section. Refer to Figure 8. Wiring Connections ReliaTel Units Locate unit wiring harness plug P7 and plug into J7 on the actuator motor. Note: If Options Module (RTOM) is not installed then connect plug 3P4 to 3J4 on the Refrigeration Module (RTRM) in the control box. Electromechanical Units Locate unit wiring harness plug PPM2A and plug into the actuator motor wiring harness. Replace access panels. Figure 8. HORIZONTAL APPLICATORS: DISCARD BLOCKOFT PATE Installation DDNNFLOa APPLICATIONS: ASSMBLE DUCT BLOCKOFF PLATE BEFORE INSTALUND ECONOMIZER FIANCE 9 DOWN IT THERE IS NO SMOKE DETECTOR Note: It Power Exhaust or Barometio lRellef accessory kite are Installed along with an Economizer, do not Install duct blockoff plate. Instructions Factory Installed Economizer Set -Up Downflow Configuration To position economizer for Downflow operation, complete the following steps: & WARNING Hazardous Voltage! Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. 1. Remove filter access panel. 2. Remove bottom blockoff from its shipping location. See Figure 9. ACC- SVN44C -EN Installation Figure 9. Figure 10. REMOVE SCREW TO RELOCATE BOTTOM BLOCKOFF FROM SHIPPING LOCATION. 3. Remove the bottom three screws from the economizer panel. 4. Pull the economizer assembly out into operating position as shown if Figure 10. 5. Secure the economizer assembly with 2 screws at the bottom of the corner posts. 6. Install bottom blockoff and secure with 3 screws. SCREWS USED T SECURE ECONOMIZER ACC- SVN44C -EN BOTTOM BLOCKOFF BOTTOM BLOCMOFF Horizontal Configuration To position economizer for horizontal operation, complete the following steps: 1. Remove filter access panel. 2. Remove item 3, adapter panel shown in Figure 1. 3. Remove the bottom three screws and top two screws from the economizer panel. 4. Remove return air blockoff shown in figure 7. 5. Pull the economizer assembly and end panel out of the unit. 6. Refer to Figure 3 and Figure 4 for reassembly instructions to Horizontal configuration. Note: (ReliaTel units only) If optional sensors for humidity and temperature monitoring are to be used (BAYENTHOO5A and BAYENTHOO6A), install them now. Use the instructions provided in the kits.) 7 Remove supply and return duct covers from the horizontal openings and install over the downflow opening. 8. To reinstall the economizer, lift into position by fitting the upper left hand corner around the channel in the cabinet post. Then pivot the economizer into the opening in the cabinet. Refer to Figure 7. 9. Lift the economizer and panel assembly to align the upper two screw holes. Secure the top by inserting 2 screws, top left 1 then top right 2. Refer to Figure 7. 10. Pull out on the bottom of the economizer and secure bottom left 3. Refer to Figure 7. 11. Replace adapter panel removed in Step 2. 12. Secure bottom right with screw engaging into adapter panel. 13. Install the bottom blockoff and secure with 3 screws. Refer to Figure 10. Minimum Position Setting To adjust the minimum position setting and check out the economizer, the power must be connected. Close the unit disconnect and place the zone sensor fan selector in the fan "ON" position and the heat/cool selector in the "OFF" position. This will place the damper in the minimum ventilation position. To adjust the minimum position setting for the required ventilation air, turn the potentiometer (on the ECA) clockwise to "open" (to increase the amount of ventilation) or counterclockwise to "close" (to decrease the amount of ventilation). The damper will open to this setting each time the blower circuit is energized. When adjusting minimum position, the damper may move to the new setting in several small steps. Once the damper has remained in position for 10 - 15 seconds without movement, it can be assumed it is at the new position. Replace the filter access panel. The damper will close when the blower circuit is de- energized. Dry Bulb Settings Standard economizer dry bulb changeover is field selectable to 4 outdoor temperatures. See the following table for potentiometer settings.The selection is made on the ECA. Reference Enthalpy Settings Economizer enthalpy changeover is field selectable to 4 points. See the following table for potentiometer settings. The selection is made on the ECA. Table 1. Potentiometer settings Potentiometer Dry Setting Bulb Enthalpy A 73F* Control Option (22.8C) B 70F (21.1C) C 67F (19.4C) D 63F (17.2C) Reference See Table Enthalpy Above (ReliaTel Only) Comparative Outdoor Air Enthalpy Enthalpy 3.0 (ReliaTel Only) BTU /lb. less than Return Air Enthalpy 27 Btu /lb (63 kJ /kg ) 25 Btu /lb (58 kJ /kg) 23 Btu /lb (53 kJ /kg) 22 Btu /lb (51 kJ /kg) • Factory Setting Table 2. Economizer option controls Optional Enable Sensors Conditions* Required ** Dry Bulb See Table None (standard) Above Outdoor Humidity (BAYENTHOO5A) Outdoor Humidity Return Humidity Return Temperature (BAYENTHOO6A) • - Economizing is enabled when these conditions are met. •• - Conditions level will be self configured when op- tional sensors are connected. 5 Literature Order Number ACC- SVN44C -EN Date 05/07 Supersedes ACC- SVN44B -EN (10/06) The manufacturer has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserves the right to change design and specifications without notice. • installer's Gue �. '►�' B PROVED OCT 0 3 1008 City Of Tukwila ILDIN DIVISION Roof Curb Packaged Rooftop Units Model: BAYCU RB042A Used with: T *CO36A, 048A, 060A TSC060A, TSCO36E, 048E, 060E THCO33A, 043A, 063A THCO36E Y *CO36A, 048A, 060A YSC060B YSCO36E, 048E, 060E YHCO33A, 043A, 063A YHCO36E WSCO36A, 048, 060A WSCO36E, 048E WSC060B May 2007 COD `. E IEWED F OR Model: BAYC U R B043A Used with: T *C072A, 090A, 092A, 102A, 120A TSC072 -120B T/YSC072 -120E THC048E, 060E Y *C072A, 090A, 092A, 102A, 120A YHC048E, 060E WSC060E, WSC072 -120A, WSC072 -090B CITY RECEIVED SEP 2 3 AN PERMIT CENTER ACC- SVN43C -EN Glossary General 3 Initial Inspection .3 Clearances 3 Installation 4 Roof Curb Installation for BAYCURB042A 4 Installation 4 Roof Curb Installation for BAYCURB043A 7 Figure 15. Roof construction 10 Figure 16. Existing roof construction 10 Figure 17. Center of gravity 12 ACC- SVN43C -EN • • • • • &WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. &CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices. CAUTION Indicates a situation that may result in equipment or property- damage- only accidents. General This manual describes the layout and installation procedures required to properly assemble and install the roof curb. Illustrations in Figure 7 for T *CO33 -063A, TSC060B, TSCO36E, 048E, 060E, Y *CO33 -063A, YSC060B, YSCO36E, 048E, 060E, WSCO36 -060A , WSC060B, WSCO36E, 048E, THCO36E, YHCO36Eunits or Figure 15 for T *C072 -120A, TSC072 -120B, Y *C072 -120A, YSC072 -120B, WSC060E, WSC072 -120A, WSC072- 090B, THC048E, 060E YHC048E, 060E, TSC072 -120E, YSC072- 120Eunits are provided for dimensional data regarding roof opening construction. Each curb package ships unassembled, along with the required hardware and gasketing material. Roof insulation, cant strips, flashing (if desired), nails, and sheet metal screws must be furnished by the installing contractor. ACC- SVN43C -EN General Information Note: Important - DO NOT discard EPS foam panels included in this kit. They are used for insulating the condenser section of the roof curb. Follow instructions for installation. Initial Inspection Compare the order number on the shipping label with the accessory identification information on the ordering and shipping documents to verify that the correct accessory has been received. Clearances The recommended clearances for single -unit installations are illustrated in Figure 6 for T *CO33- 063A, TSC060B, TSCO36E, 048E, 060E, Y *CO33 -063A, YSC060B, YSCO36E, 048E, 060E, WSCO36 -060A , WSC060B, WSCO36E, 048E, THCO36E, YHCO36E units or Figure 13 for T *C072 -120A, TSC072 -120B, TSC072 -120E, Y *C072 -120A, YSC072 -120E, YSC072 -1208, WSC060E, WSC072 -120A, WSC072- 090B, THC048E, 060E YHC048E, 060E units. These minimum requirements are not only an important consideration when determining unit placement, but they are also essential to ensure adequate serviceability, maximum capacity, and peak operation efficiency. Any reduction of the unit clearances indicated in this illustration may result in condenser coil starvation, or the recirculation of warm condenser air. Actual clearances which appear to be inadequate should be reviewed with a local sales engineer. 3 Installation Read the entire manual carefully to become familiar with the roof curb installation procedures. If the roof curb will be mounted on a new building, it can be assembled at any convenient location and installed as soon as the roof support members are in place. As a general rule, the curb should be placed directly on the roof support members. Use tack welding or other suitable fastening method to secure the roof curb in place. The curb can also be mounted on a roof deck. In this case, additional nailing plates must be provided directly below the flanges of the curb to give further support and to minimize vibration. See Figures 15 and 16. When the installation is on an existing building, hoist the shipping container directly onto the roof. Supply and Return Air Ductwork All ductwork must be run and attached to the curb before the unit is set into place. All ductwork must be fabricated and installed by the installing contractor. To ensure proper duct construction and installation, SMACNA recommendations should be closely followed. Note: All field fabricated panels used must be insulated.(See Figure 5 or Figure 12 ). Roof Opening For safety and sound considerations, do not cut out the entire roof deck within the curb area. Roof Support The roof must be capable of adequately supporting the weight of the rooftop unit as well as that of the curb; refer to Figure 17 and Tables 1 and 2 for specific center -of- gravity, corner weight information and accessory weights. Units may be set either lateral or parallel to the roof support 4 Installation members. The combined weight of the unit, accessories, and curb should be evenly spaced between a minimum of two (2) supports. Ensure that the curb's position on the roof supports does not interfere with the clearance required for the supply /return ductwork. See Figure 7 for T *CO33 -063A, TSC060B, TSCO36E, 048E, 060E, Y *CO33 -063A, YSC060B, YSCO36E, 048E, 060E, WSCO36 -060A , WSC060B, WSCO36E, 048E, THCO36E, YHCO36E units or Figure 14 for T *C072 -120A, TSC072 -120B, TSC072-120E,'Y*C072- 120A, YSC072 -120B, YSC072 -120E, WSC060E, WSC072 -120A, WSC072- 090B, THC048E, 060E, YHC048E, 060E units. Note: For convenience, it is suggested that the starting collars for the supply and return ductwork be installed before the curb is placed into position. Roof Curb Installation for BAYCURB042A T *CO33 -063A, TSC060B, TSCO36E, 048E, 060E, Y *CO33- 063A, YSC060B, YSCO36E, 048E, 060E, WSCO36 -060A , WSC060B, WSCO36E, 048E, THCO36E, YHCO36E Parts List • 2 ends • 2 sides • 3 long duct supports • 2 short duct supports • 3 insulation supports • 2 sheets of EPS foam insulation • Gasket • These instructions There are more attachment locations (raised triangular shaped corner slots) than actual component attachments; to assemble the roof curb, you will need a tape measure to assure components are in the correct orientation. Locate the correct attachment slots for the internal supports using the dimensions from the diagram. Set the two (2) sides and two (2) ends on a flat surface to form a square, with the wood nailers facing the outside. Assembling a long duct support at this point will hold the sides in place while fastening ends. 2. Screw the sides and ends together with the 1/4x5/8 screws provided. 3. Assemble a long (37.42 ") duct support between the two sides: insert the first duct support 14.5 inches fiom either end by inserting the tabs on each end of the duct support into the appropriate triangular shaped slots. See Figure 1, p. 5. For your convenience we have provided screws and screw holes for securing each duct support. Use one screw for each end of a long duct support. These screws are not necessary for strength or function, but are to prevent accidental disassembly during duct attachment. 4. Insert the other two long duct supports as shown. See Figure 2, p. 5. Verify the 4.88" and 16.75" dimensions between long duct supports. 5. Locate the position for the short duct support, 10.49" from the side, that fits between the first long duct support and the end. Insert the support flanges into the appropriate corner catches. Verify the 10.49" dimension.See Figure 3, p. 5 6. Insert the second short duct support between the middle and left long duct supports. Verify the 17.84" dimension from the duct support to the side. See Figure 3, p. 5 7. Insert the three (3) insulation supports between the left end and the closest long duct support, being sure to insert the tabs into the slots in the top of the end piece. See Figure 3, p. 5. 8. Install insulation and gasket. See Figure 4, p. 5 and Figure 5, p. 5. 1. ACC- SVN43C -EN • Long Duct Support Figure 1. ACC SVN43C - EN Step one Long Duct Supports Figure 2. Step two Short Duct Support Figure 3. Step three Insulation Support Installation Figure 4. Step four Gasket 4 BAYCURB042A EPS Foa Panels Figure 5. Step five EPS Foam Panels 5 37 7/16 14• 356 MM 951 MM 65 / C 1670 MM 19. rJ � J9 MM Installation 1 3/4' ^ 'Y <44 MM I8. r9i r M,y �/A�J /4 1656 MM 65 3/16• ��77 04, 2 51 MM 40 7/8' 1038 MM 41 7/16' 1053 MM Figure 6. Curb Dimensional Data T*CO33 -063A, TSC060B, TSCO36E, 048E, 060E, Y *CO33 -063A, YSC060B, YSCO36E, 048E, 060E, WSCO36 -060A , WSC060B, WSCO36E, 048E, THCO36E, YHCO36E ALL FLANGES 1 114• (32 MM) Figure 7. Curb Dimensional Data T *CO33 -063A, TSC060B, TSCO36E, 048E, 060E, Y *CO33 O63A, YSC060B, YSCO36E, 048E, 060E, WSCO36 -060A , WSC060B, WSCO36E, 048E, THCO36E, YHCO36E BAYCURB042A 6 ACC- SVN43C -EN • • Roof Curb Installation for BAYCURB043A T *C072 -120A, TSC072 -120B, TSC072 -120E, Y *C072 -120A, YSC072 -120B, YSC072 -120E, WSC060E, WSC072 -120A, WSC072 -090B, THC048E, 060E YHC048E, 060E Parts List • 2 ends • 2 sides • 3 long duct supports • 2 short duct supports • 3 insulation supports • 3 sheets of EPS foam insulation • Gasket • These instructions There are more attachment locations (raised triangular shaped corner slots) than actual component attachments, so to assemble the roof curb, you will need a tape measure to assure components are in the correct orientation. Use the dimensions from the diagram to locate the correct attachment slots for the internal supports. 1. Set the two (2) sides and two (2) ends on a flat surface to form a square, with the wood nailers facing the outside. See Figure 8, p. 8. Assembling a long duct support at this point will hold the sides in place while fastening ends. 2. Screw the sides and ends together with the 1/4x5/8 screws provided. ACC- SVN43C -EN Installation 3. Assemble a long (46.18 ") duct support between the two sides (Return section): insert the first duct support 18.43 inches from either end by inserting the tabs on each end of the duct support into the appropriate triangular shaped slots. See Figure 9, p. 8. For your convenience we have provided screws and screw holes for securing each duct support. Use one screw for each end of a long duct support. These screws are not necessary for strength or function, but are to prevent accidental disassembly during duct attachment. 4. Insert the other two long duct supports as shown on the top view (Supply Section).See Figure 9, p. 8. Verify the 5.18" and 18.45" dimensions between long duct supports. 5. At 10.25" from the side, locate the position for the short duct support that fits between the first long duct support and the end. Insert the support flanges into the appropriate corner catches. Verify the 10.27" dimension. See Figure 10, p. 8. 6. Insert the second short duct support between the middle and left long duct supports. Verify the 10.27" dimension from the duct support to the side (in line with previously assembled short duct support). See Figure 10, p. 8. 7. Insert the three (3) insulation supports between the left end and the closest long duct support, being sure to insert the tabs into the slots in the top of the end piece. See Figure 11, p. 8. 8. Install three pieces of foam insulation and gasket. See Figure 12, p. 8. BAYCURB043A 7 Figure 8. Step one Long Duct Supports Figure 9. Step two Short duct support Ki 10. Step three Installation Insullation support Figure 11. Step four Gasket Figure 12. Step five BAYCURB043A EPS Foam Panels EPS Foam Panels ACC- SVN43C -EN • is • Figure 13. Curb Dimensional Data — T *C072 -120A, TSC072 -120B, TSC072 -120E, Y *C072 -120A, YSC072- 120B, YSC072 -120E, WSC060E, WSC072 -120A, WSC072 -090B, THC048E, 060E, YHC048E, 060E Note: Curb plenum drops /duct inserts were designed and tested to hold 250 lbs. Please ensure that duct drops are supported per local building codes Installation ALL FLANGES 1 1/4" (31 MM) Figure 14. Curb Dimensional Data — T *C072 -120A, TSC072 -120B, TSC072 -120E, Y *C072- 120A, YSC072 -120B, YSC072 -120E, WSC060E, WSC072 -120A, WSC072 -0908, THC048E, 060E, YHCO48E, 060E ACC- SVN43C -EN BAYCURB043A 9 Screw securing roof felt to Rigid Insulation or 2 by 12 (51 mm X 305 mm) Flashing (field supplied) Roofing Felt (field supplied) 4 by 4 Cant (102 mm X 102 mm) (field supplied) Figure 15. Roof construction Screw securing roof felt to Rigid Insulation or 2 by 12 51 mm X 305 mm) 10 Flashing (field supplied) Roofing Felt (field supplied) 4 by 4 Cant (102 mm X 102 mm) (field supplied) Figure 16. Existing roof construction Installation 1 1/2" by 1 1/4" Nailer (Kit supplied) 2 by 2 Nailer Strip (Kit supplied) ROOF PURLIN Support Channels Curb Assembly Screws Rigid Insullation or Wood 2 by 12 (51 mm X 305 mm) (field supplied) Screw securing Rigid Insulation or Wood 2 by 12 to Curb (51 mm X 305 mm) Curb Assembly Screws Rigid Insullation or Wood 2 by 12 (51 305mm) (field supplied) Screw securing Rigid Insulation or Wood 2 by 12 to Curb Wood Nailers (field supplied) ACC -SV N43C -E N • ®Table 2. Gas heating corner weights and center of gravity Table 1. Cooling corner weights and center of gravity Unit Model TSCO36E(1,3,4,W) TSCO36A(1,3,4, W) * TSC048A1* TSC048A(3,4,W)* TSC048E(1,3,4, W ) TSC060A(1, 3,4, K, W) * TSC060E(1,3,4,W) TSC072A(3,4,K,W)* TSC072E TSC090A(3,4,K,W)* TSC092A(3,4,W)* TSC092E TSC 102A(3, 4, K, W) * TSC102E TSC120A(3,4, K, W )* TSC120E THCO36A1* THCO33A(3,4, W) * THCO36A(3,4, W) * THCO36E(1, 3,4,) * THC048A1* THC043A(3,4, W) * THC048A(3,4, W )* THC048E(1,3,4,)* THC060A1* THC060A(3,4, W )* THC060E(1,3,4)* THC063A(3,4, W )* THC072A(3,4, W )* THC092A(3,4, W )* THC102A(3,4,W)* THC120A(3,4,W)* Table 2. Gas heating corner weights and center of gravity Unit Model YSCO36A1 *(L,M,X,Y) YSCO36A1 *(H,Z) YSCO36A(3, 4, W) * (L, M, X,Y) YSCO36A(3,4, W )* (H,Z) YSCO36E(1,3,4,W) YSC048A1 *(L,M,X,Y) YSC048A1 *(H,Z) YSC048A(3,4, W) * (L, M, X,Y) YSC048A(3,4,W) *(H,Z) YSC048E(1, 3,4, W ) YSC060A1 *(L,M,X,Y) YSC060A1 *(H,Z) YSC060A(3,4,K,W) *(L,M,X,Y) YSC060A(3,4, K, W) * (H,Z) YSC060E(1,3,4, W YSC072A(3,4,K,W) *(L,X) YSC072A(3,4, W) *(M,Y) YS C072A (3, 4, K, W) * (H, Z ) YSC072E YSC090A(3,4, K, W) * (L,X) YSC090A(3,4, W) *(M,Y) YSC090A(3,4,K, W) *(H,Z) YSC092A(3,4,W)*(L,X) YSC092A(3,4, W) *(M,Y) YSC092A(3,4,W) *(H,Z) YSC092E YSC102A(3,4,K,W) *(L,X) YSC102A(3,4,W) *(M,Y) YSC102A(3,4,K,W) *(H,Z) YSC102E YSC120A(3,4,K,W) *(L,X) ACC SVN43C - EN Net Weight A 80 157 409 132 434 140 421 135 511 167 451 149 561 183 681 236 755 295 754 257 756 261 866 358 835 281 905 359 880 298 996 388 426 139 457 139 426 139 472 109 468 146 468 146 468 146 653 155 518 165 506 164 676 204 506 164 718 235 857 289 893 294 982 323 Net Weight (Ibs) 453 480 453 480 532 478 505 465 492 563 494 522 494 522 613 720 731 735 793 804 808 820 806 810 822 916 883 887 899 953 933 Installation Corner Weight B 122 104 110 109 129 114 142 177 136 188 202 147 223 161 238 185 108 108 108 85 113 113 113 127 124 121 74 121 182 222 233 253 C 95 79 91 90 101 88 111 119 209 129 131 252 149 265 158 281 84 84 84 186 97 97 97 248 105 100 327 100 128 148 159 178 D 107 94 94 88 114 99 125 150 115 180 162 109 181 120 187 142 95 95 95 92 111 111 111 123 124 122 71 122 173 197 207 229 Corner Wt. (Ibs) Center of Gray. Length Width 31 19 31 19 32 19 33 19 31 19 31 18 31 19 38 21 40 23 37 22 39 21 41 22 40 21 42 23 40 21 41 23 32 19 32 19 32 19 40 26 31 20 31 20 31 20 40 25 31 19 31 19 41 26 31 19 38 22 38 21 39 22 39 22 A B C D Length Width 143 116 90 104 32 19 151 124 96 109 32 19 143 116 90 104 32 19 151 124 96 109 32 19 165 137 95 134 31 19 151 122 102 103 33 19 159 130 108 109 33 19 146 121 101 97 33 19 154 129 107 103 33 19 175 145 101 142 31 19 160 127 99 108 32 18 169 134 105 114 32 18 160 127 99 108 32 18 169 134 105 114 32 18 190 158 110 155 31 19 245 188 129 158 39 21 248 192 131 160 39 21 249 193 132 161 39 21 304 146 219 124 41 23 269 203 142 190 38 22 270 204 143 191 38 22 273 208 146 193 38 22 273 217 143 172 40 21 274 219 144 173 40 21 277 222 147 175 40 21 370 160 265 121 41 22 293 238 161 191 40 "21 294 239 162 192 40 21 297 243 165 194 40 21 371 173 277 132 42 23 310 253 171 198 40 21 Table 2. Note: Center of Gravity (In.) Gas heating corner weights and center a Corner weights are given for information only. Unit is to be supported continuously by a curb or equivalent frame support. 11 ....,.. - YHC060A(3,4,W) *(H,Z) 561 _.,,. 178 _.._ 137 _ .. 113 ....... 134 31 19 YHC060E(1,3,4)* Y � 511 157 126 108 121 32 20 YHC043A 3,4,W) *(H Z) 577 167 144 139 127 32 20 YHC048A (3,4,W) *(H,Z) 539 166 133 114 126 32 20 YHC048E (1,3,4)* 725 173 145 266 141 40 25 ....,.. - YHC060A(3,4,W) *(H,Z) 561 _.,,. 178 _.._ 137 _ .. 113 ....... 134 31 19 YHC060E(1,3,4)* 748 222 92 345 89 41 26 YHC063A 3,4,W)* H,Z) 561 178 137 113 134 31 19 YHC072A 3,4,W)* L,X) 756 245 193 137 181 39 22 YHC072A 3,4,W * M,Y) 768 248 197 140 183 39 22 YHC072A 3,4,W)* H,Z) 772 249 198 141 184 39 22 YHC092A (3,4,W)* L,X) 907 302 238 161 207 39 22 YHC092A ....,,,,,,A.= (3,4,W)* M,Y) w uA * u 9\ 911 n00 303 7ne 239 'fA9 162 ter 208 n1 39 On 22 n.1 Table 2. Gas heating corner weights and center of gravity YSC120E VHCO36A1* (L,M,X,Y) YHCO36A1 *(H,Z) YHCO33A(3,4, W) *(L,M,X,Y) YHCO36A W) * YHCO33A 3,4,W)* H,Z YHCO36A(3,4,W )*(H,Z) YHCO36E(1,3,4)* YHC048A1 *(M,Y) YHC048A1 *(H,Z YHC060A1 *(L,M YHC060A1 *(H,Z) YH C060A(3 , 4, W) * (L, M , X,Y) vurnwei� *n M Vv1 YHC102A(3,4, W )* (L,X) YHC102A(3,4,W) *(M,Y) YHC102A 3,4,1 *(H,Z) YHC120A 3,4,W *(L,X) YHC120A 3,4,W *(M,Y) YHC120A(3,4,W) *(H,Z) Table 3. Heat pump corner weight and center of gravity C ENTER O WIDTH 0 CENTER OF GRAVITY Figure 17. 12 CENTER OP GRAVITY LENGTH Center of gravity 1058 470 497 537 470 537 497 544 511 539 562 574 550 942 946 957 1035 1047 1060 Installation 403 150 158 159 150 159 158 127 157 166 176 179 175 306 307 310 336 339 342 201 120 128 139 120 139 128 103 126 133 13 7 140 133 247 248 252 269 272 277 297 95 101 126 95 126 101 204 108 114 157 105 110 111 105 111 110 110 121 126 133 136 131 171 217 172 218 175 220 191 240 194 242 197 245 WSCO36A (1,3,4,W)* 442 138 110 88 105 31 19 WSCO36E (1,3,4,W) 514 177 107 113 117 29 20 WSC048A(1,3,4,W)* 474 151 114 95 114 31 19 WSC048E(1,3,4,W) 525 -- 181 109 115 119 29 20 WSC060A 1,3,4,W * 492 160 118 97 117 31 19 WSC060E(1,3,4,W) 682 228 177 114 163 38 24 WSC060(A,B)(D,T)* 532 170 128 107 127 31 19 WSC072A(3,4,W)* 724 243 184 128 170 38 22 WSC072(A,B)(D,T)* 812 269 206 146 191 38 22 WSC090A(3,4,W)* 794 272 200 137 185 38 22 WSC090(A,B)(D,T)* 834 282 210 147 195 38 22 WSC120A(3,4,W)* 941 320 243 162 215 38 21 WSC120AT* 981 33 253 172 225 38 21 42 32 32 32 32 32 32 39 32 32 31 32 31 22 39 22 40 22 39 22 39 22 40 22 39 23 19 19 19 19 19 19 26 20 20 2 20 19 • • Figure 18. Center of gravity ACC- SVN43C -EN Installation Table 4. Accessory Weights - T *CO33- 063A, TSC060B, Y *CO33 -063A, YSC060B, T /YSCO36E -060E, WSCO36 -060A, WSCO36E -048E, WSC060B, THCO36E, YHCO36E Option/ Accessory Description Electric Heat Economizer Net lbs Net kg 15 6.8 26 11.8 Motorized 20 9.1 Damper Manual Damper 16 7.3 Barometric Relief 7 3.2 Oversize Motor 5 2.3 Belt Drive Motor 31 14.1 (3 phase only) Hinged Access 10 4.5 Hail Guard 12 5.4 Through the Base 8 3.6 Electrical Through the 5 2.3 Base: Gas Unit Disconnect 5 2.3 Switch Unit Circuit 5 2.3 Breaker Cony. Outlet: 2 0.9 Unpowered Cony. Outlet: 38 17.2 Powered TCI, LCI 1 0.5 NOVAr 8 3.6 HPC 1 0.5 Frostat 1 0.5 Crankcase Heater 1 0.5 Smoke Detector, 7 3.2 Return Smoke Detector, 5 2.3 Supply Clogged Filter 1 0.5 Switch Fan Fail Switch 1 0.5 Discharge Air 3 1.4 Tube Roofcurb 70 31.7 Hard Start Kit 3 1.4 All Zone Sensors 1 0.5 Reheat Coil 15 6.8 Table 5. Accessory Weights - T *C072- 120A, TSC072 -120B, TSC072 -120E, Y *C072 -120A, YSC072 -120B, YSC072- 120E, WSC060E, WSC072 -120A, WSC072- 090B, THC048E, 060E, YHC048E, 060E Option / Accessory Description Electric Heat Economizer Motorized Damper Manual Damper Barometric Relief Power Exhaust Oversize Motor Hinged Access Hail Guard Through the Base: Electrical Through the Base : Gas Unit Disconnect Switch Unit Circuit Breaker Conv. Outlet: Unpowered Cony. Outlet: Powered TCI, LCI NOVAR HPC Frostat Crankcase Heater Smoke Detector, Return Smoke Detector, Supply Clogged Filter Switch Fan Fail Switch Discharge Air Tube Roofcurb LP Conversion Kit All Zone Sensors Reheat Coil Net lbs Net kg 30 13.6 36 16.3 30 13.6 26 11.8 10 4.5 80 36.3 8 3.6 12 5.4 20 9.1 13 5.9 5 2.3 5 2.3 5 2.3 2 0.9 38 17.2 1 0.5 8 3.6 1 0.5 1 0.5 1 0.5 7 3.2 5 2.3 1 0.5 1 0.5 3 1.4 115 52.2 3 1.4 1 0.5 25 11.3 13 Literature Order Number ACC- SVN43C -EN Date 05/07 Supersedes ACC- SVN43B -EN (10/06) The manufacturer has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserves the right to change design and specifications without notice. Installer's Guide Models : BAYHTRS309A BAYHTRS318A BAYHTRS327A BAYHTRS336A BAYHTRS409A BAYHTRS418A BAYHTRS427A BAYHTRS436A BAYHTRSWO9A BAYHTRSW 18A BAYHTRSW27A BAYHTRSW36A BAYHTRT309A BAYHTRT318A BAYHTRT327A BAYHTRT336A BAYHTRT354A BAYHTRT409A BAYHTRT418A BAYHTRT427A BAYHTRT436A BAYHTRT454A BAYHTRTW 18A BAYHTRTW27A BAYHTRTW36A BAYHTRTW54A Used With: Customer Property: Contains wiring and service informa- tion. Please retain. Library Product Section Product Model Literature Type Sequence Date File No. Supersedes Electric Heaters T *C072A4, T *C072AD, T *C072AK, TSC090A4, TSCO9OAD, TSCO9OAK, TSC092A4, WSC072A4, WSC072AD, WSC090A4, WSCO9OAD T *C072A3, TSC090A3, TSC092A3, WSC072A3, WSC090A3 r-. T *C072A3, TSC090A3, TSC092A3, WSC072A3, WSC072AT, WSCO WSCO9OAT T *C072A3, TSC090A3, TSC092A3, WSC072A3, WSC072AT, WSC090A3, WSCO90AT T*C072A3, TSC090A3, TSC092A3, WSC072A3, WSC072AT, WSC090A3, WSCO9OAT T*C072A4, TSC090A4, TSC092A4, WSC072A4, WSC090A4 T *C072A4, T *C072AD, T *C072AK, TSC090A4, TSCO9OAD, TSCO9OAK TSC092A4, WSC072A4, WSC072AD, WSC090A4, WSCO9OAD T *C072A4, T *C072AD, T *C072AK, TSC090A4, TSCO9OAD, TSCO9OAK, TSC092A4, WSC072A4, WSC072AD, WSC090A4, WSCO9OAD T *C072AW, TSC090AW, TSC092AW, WSC072AW, WSC090AW T *C072AW, TSC090AW, TSC092AW, WSC072AW, WSC090AW T *C072AW, TSC090AW, TSC092AW, WSC072AW, WSC090AW T *C072AW, TSC090AW, TSC092AW, WSC072AW, WSC090AW TSC102A3, THC092A3, THC102A3 T *C102A3, T *C120A3, THC092A3, WSC120A3 T *C102A3, T *C120A3, THC092A3, WSC120A3 T *C102A3, T *C120A3, THC092A3, WSCO9OAT, WSC120A3, WSC120AT T *C120A3, WSC120A3, WSC120AT T *C102A4, THC092A4 T *C102A4, T *C120A4, THC092A4, WSC120A4 T *C102A4, TSC102AD, TSC102AK, T *C120A4, WSCO9OAD, WSC120A4, WSC120AD T *C102A4, TSC102AD, TSC102AK, T *C120A4, THC092A4, WSC120A4 T *C120A4, TSC120AD, TSC120AK, WSC120A4, WSC120AD T *C102AW, T *C120AW, THC092AW, WSC120AW T *C102AW, T*C120AW, THC092AW, WSC120AW T *C102AW, T *C120AW, THC092AW, WSC120AW TSC120AW, THC120AW, WSC120AW EHTR -IN- 41 B 18- HB60D24 -2 Service Literature Unitary Unitary Accessories Elect., Steam, Hot Water Coils r ".1 Installer's Guide 41B January 2003 SV -UN- ACC - EHTR- IN -41B 1/03 EHTR -IN -41 B 7/02 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANC E APPROVED OCT o3 2008 City Of Tukwila I RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA SEP 2 3 2008 PERMIT CENTER MQ 2Y1 Table of Contents General 3 3 Inspection 3 Installation 6 Table 2 - Air Temperature Rise (60 hz) 6 Table 3 - Cooling Only Units - 208/230 Volt (60 hz) 7 Table 4 - Cooling Only Units - 380 Volt (60 hz) 7 Table 5 - Cooling Only Units - 460 Volt (60 hz) 8 Table 6 - Cooling Only Units - 575 Volt (60 hz) 9 Table 7 - Heat Pump Units - 208/230/460/575 Volt (60 hz) 10 Table 8 - Air Temperature Rise 200 Volt (50 hz) 10 Table 9 - Air Temperature Rise 380 -415 Volt (50 hz) Table 10 - Cooling Only Units - 380/415 Volt (50 hz) 10 1 Table 11 - Heat Pump Units - 380/415 Volt (50 hz) 11 Table 12 - Heat Pump Units - 200 Volt (50 hz) I .:072 'SCO7 General ALL phases of this installation must comply with NA- TIONAL, STATE AND LOCAL CODES. Installer must mark unit nameplate with Heater Information per instructions on nameplate. Note: If digit 9 in the unit model number equals "E" (Electra Mechanical Control), accessory relay BAY24X042 is required if the thermostat does not energize the fan circuit in the heating mode. See Figure 1 for wiring information. Inspection 1. Unpack all components of the kit. 2. Check carefully for any shipping damage. If any damage is found it must be reported immediately and a claim made against the transportation company. 3. Check the heater nameplate model number and compare with Tables 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11 or 12. Ensure that the available power supply and unit's model number com- plies with the particular heater being used. Installation ® WARNING O PEN AND LOCK UNIT DISCONNECT TO PREVENT INJURY OR DEATH FROM ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR CONTACT WITH MOVING PARTS. 1. Remove heater compartment access panel and unit con- trol box access panel. See Figure 2. Note :On downflow units with or without duct work installed or horizontal units without ductwork installed, remove horizontal supply cover from the rear of the heater compartment. 2. Remove insulation to expose perimeter of removable panel in the vestibule panel. See Figure 2. 3. Clip or cut the retaining tabs around the perimeter of the removable panel. 4. Remove the panel. 5. Check the opening in the vestibule panel. Remove any metal burrs or slivers that could damage or pinch the heater elements resulting in a short circuit when ele- ments are installed in the opening. Note: Locator tabs on the vestibule panel support the electric heat assembly and secure the inward edge of the electric heat accessory control panel. Slits In the insulation should allow the tabs to protrude through the insulation and be visible. However, it may be necessary to work the insulation back from the tabs and slightly bend the tabs outward if difficulty is encountered engaging the electric heater panel or the electric heat accessory control panel. See Figure 3. 6. The electric heater element assembly has "BOTTOM" stamped in the mounting panel to identify the proper po- sition for mounting. 3 7. Refer to the Table1. If the unit/heater combination being installed is the same as any in this table, and the applica- tion is for horizontal airflow, the limit control TCO -A must be replaced with the extra limit control shipped with the heater. Replace TCO -A following the instructions in steps 8 and 9. If the unit/heater combination being in- stalled does not correspond to any in this table, or if the application is for downflow airflow, skip steps 8 and 9 and go on to step 10. Table 1 Unit Model Number WSC072A4, 090A4 WSC072AW, 090AW WSC 120A4 WSC 120AW Electric Heater Model Number BAYHTRS427A 436A BAYHTRSW27, W36 BAYHTRT454A BAYHTRTW54A 8. TCO -A is the limit control located in the central part of the heater mounting plate and that is located on the bot- tom of the two heater element assemblies. To replace this device, first remove the two wires connected to the terminals. Next, remove the two screws which secure it to the heater element mounting plate. Once TCO -A has been removed from the heater element mounting plate, discard this device. 9. Obtain the replacement TCO-A which is secured with a wire tie near the unit/heater terminal block located on the electric heater control panel. Attach it to the heater ele- ment mounting plate with the two screws that were re- moved in step 8.. Connect the two wires that were un- hooked in step 8 to the terminals on the new TCO -A. Refer to the heater package wiring diagram to assure that the wiring is connected properly. Note: The back of the electric heater element assembly is supported by a factory Installed Electric Heat Support Rod Hanger or other sheet metal device in the unit. 10. Tilt the back of the electric heater element assembly slightly upward as it is positioned in the opening to en- gage the support rod with the support rod hanger. Be very careful to avoid dragging the heater element on the edges of the opening in vestibule panel, as this could damage or pinch the heater elements resulting in a short circuit. Engage the bottom edge of heater element panel with the two locator tabs. See Figure 3. 11. Secure the electric heater element assembly with 6 screws. 12. Slide the electric heater control panel/access door as- sembly inward until the rear edge engages with retaining clips. See Figure 3. Secure the outer edge with 2 screws. 13. To install the latch panel assembly, loosen one existing screw from the upper left side of the electric heater com- partment opening. Position the latch panel assembly and secure with 3 screws. See Figure 3. 14. Remove the wire nuts from W1, W2 and W3. 15. Route the wires through the wire access opening in the divider panel, then up to the unit control box enter- ing through the bottom wire access opening on the left side. Secure wires to the existing harness. 16. In the unit control box, route the wires along the exist- ing harness to contactor CC1. Secure wires to existing harness. See Figure 4. 17. Locate the low voltage wire harness with polarized plug in the electric heater section compartment. Re- move the factory installed jumper. Connect the low voltage polarized plug from the unit to the polarized plug on the electric heater assembly. 18. Wire heater element assembly to electric heater con- trol panel according to the wiring diagram attached to the electric heater control panel door. 19. Secure green ground wire from the electric heat con- trol panel to the right hand wall of electric heater com- partment with star washer and #10 grounding screw. 20. Wire W1, W2 and W3 wires to CC1 according to the wiring diagram attached to the unit control panel door. 21. Route single point power entry wires through the front access opening of the support panel adjacent to the electric heater section compartment. Using good installation practices, provide strain relief for high volt- age wires where necessary. See Figure 4. Note: Ensure that field wiring compiles with all applicable codes. Caution: Use only copper conductors to prevent equipment damage. Unit terminals are not designed to accept any other wiring. Figure 1 For 2 Stage Heating For 2 Stage Y1 Cooling COM RED 0- ELECTRO MECHANICAL ELECTRIC / ELECTRIC UNITS 4 22. Wire according to the wiring diagram attached to the electric heater control panel door. Ground unit at ground- ing lug provided on electric heater control panel assem- bly. &CAUTION: : After heater is installed and before ap- plying power, verify that heating elements are not dam- aged or pinched and that heating elements are not short circuited to each other or to the heater frame or equip- ment cabinet by doing the following: 1.Test every heater element with ohmmeter and verify that heater element terminals are electrically isolated from cabinet and ground (infinite resistance). 2. On downfiow units with or without duct work installed or horizontal units without ductwork installed, re- move horizontal supply cover and carefully inspect elements after installation for damage or proximity to supporting structure or cabinet. At least 1/4" clear- ance is required around electric heater coils. IMPORTANT: Be sure to check tightness of all terminal connections, clamps, screws, etc., as these may have become loose. In shipment. Retighten all electrical connections after equipment has been in operation and components have reached operating temperature. 23. Close electric heater control panel access door, replace heat section access panel and unit control box access panel. Replace horizontal supply cover. Be careful when replacing cover and make sure gasketing is not torn or missing. Gasket must make water tight seal. 24. Scratch out the square on unit nameplate showing heater model installed in unit. 173 C (Bm) 101MM (Btu) 175 0 (Blk) 174 B (Bm) 178 D (Yellow 184 A Blow UNIT . H, sco Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 I Horizontal Supply Cover II Removable Insulation Removable Panel Heat Section Access Panel Ali MOW Control Box Access Panel SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY LOCATOR TAPS 5 Table 2 Air Temperature Rise 6 Ton 71/2 Ton 71/2 Ton 81/2 Ton 10 Ton 2000 CFM (2) • 3000 CFM 3000 CFM 3400 CFM 4000 CFM (See Note 2) (See Note 3) No. of TH/SC072A3 WSC072A3 TSC090A3 WSC090A3 TH/SC092A3 TH/SC102A3 TH/SC120A3 WSC120A3 Nominal Capacity TH/SC072A4 WSC072A4 TSC090A4 WSC090A4 TH/SC092A4 TH/SC102A4 TH/SC120A4 WSC120A4 kW input Stages TH/SC072AW WSC072AW TSC090AW WSC090AW TH/SC092AW TH/SC102AW THISC12AKW WSC120AW TSC072AK TSC09OAK 9.0 1 14.2 14.2 9.5 9.5 9.5 8.4 11.3 1 14.9 14.9 11.9 11.9 16.9 2 22.3 22.3 17.8 17.8 15.7 15.7 13.4 13.4 18.0 1 28.5 28.5 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.7 14.2 14.2 22.6 2 29.8 29.8 23.8 23.8 21.0 17.9 17.9 27.0 2 42.7 42.7 28.5 28.5 28.5 25.1 21.3 26.7 33.80 2 36.00 2 56.9 56.9 37.9 37.9 37.9 33.5 28.5 42.7 54.00 2 Notes: 1. The air temperature rise across the heaters is: (Heater kW x 3414)/(1.08 x CFM) 2. The minimum allowable airflow for a 6 ton air conditioner (T) with a 36.0 kW heater is 2200 CFM. 3. The minimum allowable airflow for a 6 ton heat pump (W) with a 36.0 kW heater is 2450 CFM. Table 3 Standard Indoor Motor Oversize Indoor Motor Unit Heater Heater Control Max Fuse Size Or Max Fuse Size Or Model No. Model No. KW Rating' Stages MCA Max Circuit Breaker MCA Max Circuit Breaker 208/230 Volts Three Phase BAYHTRS309A 6.8 / 9.0 1 32.2 / 33.4 50 / 50 TSC072A3 BAYHTRS318A 13.5 / 18.0 1 53.1 / 60.4 60 / 70 BAYHTRS327A 20.3 / 27.0 2 76.6 / 87.5 80 / 90 BAYHTRS336A 27.0 / 36.0 2 100.1 / 114.5 110 / 125 BAYHTRS309A 6.8 / 9.0 1 34.8 / 34.8 50 / 50 THC072A3 BAYHTRS318A 13.5 / 18.0 1 53.1 / 60.4 60 / 70 BAYHTRS327A 20.3 / 27.0 2 76.6 / 87.5 80 / 90 BAYHTRS336A 27.0 / 36.0 2 100.1 / 114.5 110 / 125 BAYHTRS309A 6.8 / 9.0 1 42.7 / 42.7 60 / 60 TSO090A3 BAYHTRS318A 13.5 / 18.0 1 54.8 / 62.0 60 / 70 BAYHTRS327A 20.3 / 27.0 2 78.3 / 89.1 80 / 90 BAYHTRS336A 27.0 / 36.0 2 101.8 / 116.1 110 / 125 BAYHTRS309A 6.8 / 9.0 1 38.9 / 38.9 50 / 50 TSC092A3 BAYHTRS318A 13.5 / 18.0 1 54.8 / 62.0 60 / 70 BAYHTRS327A 20.3 / 27.0 2 78.3 / 89.1 80 / 90 BAYHTRS336A 27.0 / 36.0 2 101.8 / 116.1 110 / 125 BAYHIHI309A 6.8 / 9.0 1 38.1 / 38.1 50 / 50 THC092A3 BAYHTRT318A 13.5 / 18.0 1 54.8 / 62.0 60 / 70 BAYHTFTT327A 20.3 / 27.0 2 78.3 / 89.1 80 / 90 BAYHTRT336A 27.0 / 36.0 2 101.8 / 116.1 110 / 125 BAYHTRT309A 6.8 / 9.0 1 45.1 / 45.1 60 / 60 TSC102A3 BAYHIHi318A 13.5 / 18.0 1 54.8 / 62.0 60 / 70 BAYHTRT327A 20.3 / 27.0 2 78.3 / 89.1 80 / 90 BAYHTRT336A 27.0 / 36.0 2 101.8 / 116.1 110 / 125 BAYHTRT309A 6.8 / 9.0 1 42.3 / 42.3 50 / 50 THC102A3 BAYHTRT318A 13.5 / 18.0 1 54.8 / 62.0 60 / 70 BAYHTRT327A 20.3 / 27.0 2 78.3 / 89.1 80 / 90 BAYHTRT336A 27.0 / 36.0 2 101.8 / 116.1 110 / 125 BAYHIHI318A 13.5 / 18.0 1 58.6 / 65.9 60 / 70 TSC120A3 BAYHTRT327A 20.3 / 27.0 2 82.1 / 93.0 90 / 100 BAYHTRT336A 27.0 / 36.0 2 105.6 / 120.0 110 / 125 BAYHTFT1354A 40.6 / 54.0 2 152.5 / 141.7 175 / 150 BAYHTRT318A 13.5 / 18.0 1 58.6 / 65.9 60 / 70 THC120A3 BAYHTRT327A 20.3 / 27.0 2 82.1 / 93.0 90 / 100 BAYHTRT336A 27.0 / 36.0 2 105.6 / 120.0 110 / 125 BAYHTRT354A 40.6 / 54.0 2 152.5 / 141.7 175 / 150 NOTES: 1. Heater kw ratings are at 208/240V for 208/230V units. 2. HACR type circuit breaker per NM. 6 33.5 / 35.0 54.8 / 62.0 78.3 / 89.1 101.8 / 116.1 36.1 / 36.1 54.8 / 62.0 78.3 / 89.1 101.8 / 116.1 45.8 / 45.8 58.6 / 65.9 82.1 / 93.0 105.6 / 120.0 42.0 / 42.0 58.6 / 65.9 82.1 / 93.0 105.6 / 120.0 41.2 / 41.2 58.6 / 65.9 82.1 / 93.0 105.6 / 120.0 48:2 / 48.2 58.6 / 65.9 82.1 / 93.0 105.6 / 120.0 45.4 / 45.4 58.6 / 65.9 82.1 / 93.0 105.6 / 120.0 63.6 / 70.9 87.1 / 98.0 110.6 / 125.0 157.5 / 146.7 63.6 / 70.9 87.1 / 98.0 110.6 / 125.0 157.5 / 146.7 50/50 60 /70 80 / 90 110 / 125 50 / 50 60 / 70 80 / 90 110 /125 60 / 60 60 / 70 90/100 110 / 125 50 / 50 60 / 70 90/100 110 / 125 50 / 50 60 / 70 90 / 100 110 / 125 60 / 60 60 / 70 90 / 100 110 / 125 60 / 60 60 / 70 90 / 100 110 / 125 70/80 90/100 125 / 125 175 / 150 70 / 80 90 / 100 125 / 125 175 / 150 Table 4 Unit Model No. 380 Volts TSC072A K TSC09OA K TSC102A K TSC120A K Unit Model No. Heater Model No. Three Phase BAYHTRS418A BAYHTRS427A BAYHTRS436A BAYHTRS41 Ag BAYHTRS427A BAYHTRS436A BAYHTRT427A BAYHTRT436A BAYHTRT427A BAYHTRT436A BAYHTRT454A 460 Volts Three Phase BAYHTRS409A TSC072A4 BAYHTRS418A BAYHTRS427A BAYHTRS436A BAYHTRS409A THC072A4 BAYHTRS418A BAYHTRS427A BAYHTRS436A BAYHTRS409A TSC090A4 BAYHTRS418A BAYHTRS427A BAYHTRS436A BAYHTRS409A TSC092A4 BAYHTRS418A BAYHTRS427A BAYHTRS436A BAYHTRT409A THC092A4 BAYHTRT418A BAYHTRT427A BAYHTRT436A BAYHTRT409A TSC102A4 BAYHTRT418A BAYHTRT427A BAYHTRT436A BAYHTRT409A THC102A4 BAYHTRT418A BAYHTRT427A BAYHTRT436A BAYHTRT418A TSC120A4 BAYHTRT427A BAYHTRT436A BAYHTRT454A BAYHTRT418A THC120A4 BAYHTRT427A BAYHTRT436A BAYHTRT454A NOTES: 1. Heater kw ratings are at 480V for 460V units. _ 2. HACR type circuit breaker per NEC. Standard Indoor Motor Heater Control Max Fuse Size Or KW Ratingl Stages MCA Max Circuit Breaker 11.3 16.9 22.6 11.3 16.9 22.6 16.9 22.6 16.9 22.6 33.8 NOTES: 1. All units to be installed under local codes 2. kW and MBH shown for 380V/ 415V Table 5 Heater Heater Model No. KW Rating' 9.0 18.0 27.0 36.0 9.0 18.0 27.0 36.0 9.0 18.0 27.0 36.0 9.0 18.0 27.0 36.0 9.0 18.0 27.0 36.0 9.0 18.0 27.0 36.0 9.0 18.0 27.0 36.0 18.0 27.0 36.0 54.0 18.0 27.0 36.0 54.0 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 27.6 38.3 49.0 28.4 38.3 49.0 38.3 49.0 40.1 50.9 72.3 Control Stages MCA 7 35 40 50 40 40 50 40 50 45 60 80 17.6 30.3 43.8 57.3 17.5 30.3 43.8 57.3 22.6 31.0 44.5 58.0 20.5 31.0 44.5 58.0 19.4 31.0 44.5 58.0 24-- 0 - -_ 31.0 44.5 58.0 21.4 31.0 44.5 58.0 32.9 46.4 59.9 70.8 32.9 46.4 59.9 70.8 25 35 45 60 25 35 45 60 35 35 45 60 25 35 45 60 25 35 45 60 30 35 45 60 25 35 45 60 35 50 60 80 35 50 60 80 Oversize Indoor Motor Max Fuse Size Or MCA Max Circuit Breaker 29.9 40.1 50.9 40.1 50.9 43.6 54.4 75.8 Standard Indoor Motor Oversize Indoor Motor Max Fuse Size Or Max Fuse Size Or Max Circuit Breaker MCA Max Circuit Breaker 18.2 31.0 44.5 58.0 18.1 31.0 44.5 58.0 24.1 32.9 46.4 59.9 22.0 32.9 ' 46.4 59.9 20.9 32.9 46.4 59.9 25.5 32.9 46.4 59.9 22.9 32.9 46.4 59.9 35.4 48.9 62.4 73.3 35.4 48.9 62.4 73.3 45 45 60 45 60 45 60 80 25 35 45 60 25 35 45 60 35 35 50 60 25 35 50 60 25 35 50 60 35 35 50 60 30 35 50 60 40 50 70 80 40 50 70 80 Table 6 Unit Heater Model No. Model No. Heater Control KW Rating' Stages 575 Volts Three Phase 20 BAYHTRSWO9A 9.0 1 13.0 20 14.0 25 TSC072AW BAYHTRSW18A 18.0 1 23.8 25 24.8 BAYHTRSW27A 27.0 2 34.6 35 35.6 40 BAYHTRSW36A 36.0 2 45.4 50 46.4 20 50 BAYHTRSWO9A 9.0 1 13.5 20 14.3 25 THC072AW BAYHTRSW18A 18.0 1 23.8 25 24.8 40 BAYHTRSW27A 27.0 2 34.6 35 35.6 BAYHTRSW36A 36.0 2 45.4 50 46.4 50 . BAYHTFRSWO9A 9.0 1 17.6 25 18.8 25 TSC090AW BAYHTRSW18A 18.0 1 24.8 25 26.3 40 BAYHTRSW27A 27.0 2 35.6 40 37.1 BAY HTRSW36A 36.0 2 46.4 50 47.9 50 BAYHTRSWO9A 9.0 1 15.5 20 16.7 20 TSC092AW BAYHTRSW18A 18.0 1 24.8 25 26.3 30 BAYHTRSW27A 27.0 2 35.6 40 37.1 40 BAYHTRSW36A 36.0 2 46.4 50 47.9 50 BAYHTRTW18A 18.0 1 24.8 25 26.3 30 T}iC092AW BAYHTRTW27A 27.0 2 35.6 40 37.1 40 BAYHTRTW36A 36.0 2 46.4 50 47.9 50 BAYHTRTW18A 18.0 1 24.8 25 26.3 30 TSC102A W BAY HTRTW27A 27.0 2 35.6 40 37.1 40 BAYHTRTW36A 36.0 2 46.4 50 47.9 50 BAYHTRTW18A 18.0 1 24.8 25 26.3 30 THC102AW BAYHTRTW27A 27.0 2 35.6 40 37.1 40 BAYH7RIW36A 36.0 2 46.4 50 47.9 50 BAYHTRTW18A 18.0 1 26.3 30 28.4 30 TSC120AW BAYHTRTW27A 27.0 2 37.1 40 39.3 40 BAYHTRTW36A 36.0 2 47.9 50 50.0 50 BAYHTRTW54A 54.0 2 56.6 70 58:8 60 BAYHTRTW18A 18.0 1 26.3 30 28.4 30 THC120A W BAY HTRTW27A 27.0 2 37.1 40 39.3 40 BAY HTRTW36A 36.0 2 47.9 50 50.0 50 BAYHTRTW54A 54.0 2 56.6 70 58.8 60 NOTES: 1. Heater kw ratings are at 208/240V for 208/230V units, 480V for 460V units and 600V for 575V units. 2. HACR type circuit breaker per NEC. Standard Indoor Motor Oversize Indoor Motor Max Fuse Size Or Max Fuse Size Or MCA Max Circuit Breaker MCA Max Circuit Breaker ) 8 r Table 7 Unit Model No. 208/230 Volts WSC072A3 WSC090A3 WSC120A3 Heater Model No. Three Phase BAYHTRS309A BAYHTRS318A BAYHTRS327A BAYHTRS336A BAYHTRS309A BAYHTRS318A BAYHTRS327A BAYHTRS336A BAYHTRT318A BAYHTRT327A BAYHTRT336A BAYHTRT354A 460 Volts Three Phase BAYHTRS409A WSC072A4 BAYHTRS418A BAYHTRS427A BAYHTRS436A BAYHTRS409A WSC090A4 BAYHTRS418A BAYHTRS427A BAYHTRS436A BAYHTRT418A WSC120A4 BAYHTRT427A BAYHTRT436A BAYHTRT454A 575 Volts Three Phase BAYHTRSWO9A WSC072AW BAYHTRSW18A BAYHTRSW27A BAYHTRSW36A BAYHTRSWO9A WSC090AW BAYHTRSW18A BAYHTRSW27A BAYHTRSW36A BAYHTRTW18A WSC120AW BAYHTRTW27A BAYHTRTW36A BAYHTRTW54A Standard Indoor Motor Oversize Indoor Motor Heater Control Max Fuse Size Or KW Rating' Stages MCA Max Circuit Breakers cuit re ak MCA Max ax Circuit Bre e Cer 6.8 / 9.0 13.5 / 18.0 20.3 / 27.0 27.0 / 36.0 6.8 / 9.0 13.5 / 18.0 20.3 / 27.0 27.0 / 36.0 13.5 / 18.0 20.3 / 27.0 27.0 / 36.0 40.6 / 54.0 1 55.7 / 59.3 60 / 60 57.0 / 60.6 1 79.0 / 86.3 80 / 90 80.3 / 87.6 2 102.5 / 113.4 110 / 125 103.8 / 114.7 2 126.0 / 140.4 150 / 150 127.3 / 141.7 1 64.9 / 68.5 80 / 80 69.3 / 72.9 1 88.3 / 95.5 100 / 100 92.7 / 99.9 2 111.8 / 122.7 125 / 125 116.2 / 127.1 2 135.3 / 149.7 150 / 150 139.7 / 154.1 1 97.3 / 104.6 100 / 110 104.4 / 111.7 2 120.8 / 131.7 125 / 150 127.9 / 138.8 2 144.3 / 158.7 150 / 175 151.4 / 165.8 2 191.2 / 180.3 200 / 200 198.3 / 187.4 9.0 1 30.1 18.0 1 43.8 30.7 27.0 45 44.4 2 57.3 60 57.9 36.0 2 70.8 80 9.0 1 35.4 45 37.5 18.0 1 49.0 37.5 27.0 2 50 51.1 62.5 70 64.6 36.0 2 76.0 80 18.0 1 53.5 78.1 27.0 2 67.0 60 7 36.0 2 80.5 70 70.5 57.0 54.0 2 91.4 100 84.0 94.9 9.0 1 23.3 18.0 1 34.1 25 34. 27.0 2 35 34.9 45.0 45 45.8 36.0 2 55.7 60 9.0 1 27.7 56.5 18.0 1 38.5 35 29.7 27.0 45 40.5 2 49.3 50 36.0 2 60.1 70 51.3 18.0 1 42.6 45.5 27.0 2 53.5 45 45.5 36.0 2 64.2 56.4 54.0 2 73.0 80 67.1 75.9 NOTES: 1. Heater kw ratings are at 208/240V for 208/230v units, 480V for 460V units and 600V for 575V units. 2. HACR type circuit breaker per NEC. 9 60/70 90 / 90 110 / 125 150 / 150 90 / 90 100 / 100 125 / 150 150 / 175 110 /125 150 / 150 175 / 175 200 / 200 35 45 60 80 45 60 70 80 60 80 90 100 25 35 50 60 35 45 60 70 50 60 70 80 Table 8 Air Temperature•Rlse Across Electric Heaters (Degrees C) 8 Ton 7.5 Ton 4100 M 5100 M kW Voltage Stages WSC072AD, AT WSC090AD, AT 11.3 200/50/3 1 8.3 6.8 12.5 200/50/3 1 9.1 7.3 13.5 200/50/3 1 9.9 7.9 16.9 200/50/3 2 12.4 9.9 18.8 200/50/3 2 13.8 11.0 20.2 200/50/3 2 '14.8 11.8 22.6 200/50/3 2 • 16.5 13.2 25.0 200/50/3 2 18.3 14.6 26.9 200/50/3 2 19.7 15.7 33.9 200/50/3: 2 - -- 37.5 200/50/3 2 40.4 200/50/3 2 -- NOTE: For minimum design airflow, see performance table for each unit. To calculate temp rise at differrent airflow, use following formula: Temp. Rise (C across Elect Htr = (kW x 2985)/( M Table 9 Alr Temperature Rise Across Electric Heaters (Degrees C) 8Ton 7.5 Ton 4100 M3 /H 5100 M3 /H TSC072AD TSCO9OAD kW 380V / 415V Voltage Stages 07.5 / 09.0 380- 415/50/3 2 10.9 / 13.0 380-415/50/3 2 -- 11.3 / 13.5 '380-415/5013 1 8.3 / 9.9 14.4 / 17.2 380-415/50/3 2 18.9 / 20.2 380-415/50/3 2 12.4 / 14.8 22.6 / 26.9 380- 415/50/3 2 18.5. / 19.7 33.8 / 40.4 380- 415/50/3 2 -- NOTE: For minimum design airflow, see performance table for each unit. To calculate temp rise at differrent airflow, use following formula: Temp. Rise (C°) across Elect Htr = (kW x 2985)/( M Table 10 Unit Model No. 380/415 Volts Three Phase BAYHTRS418A TSC072AD BAYHTRS427A BAYHTRS436A BAYHTRS418A TSC090AD BAYHTRS427A BAYHTRS43BA BAYHTRT427A BAYHTRT436A BAYHTRT427A TSC120AD BAYHTRT436A BAYHTRT454A TSC102A0 Heater Heater' Control Model No. kW Rating ' MBH Stages NOTES: 1. All units to be installed under local codes 2. kW and MBH shown for 380V / 415V 6.6 / 7.9 9.9 / 11.8 13.2 / 15.7 10 Ton 6800 M WSC120AD, AT 7.4 8.3 8.9 9.9 11.0 11.8 14.9 16.5 17.7 8.5 Ton 10 Ton 5800 M3 / H 6800 M3 / H TSC102AD TSC120AD 8.7 / 10.4 7.4 / 8.9 11.7 / 13.9 9.9 / 11.8 14.8 / 17.7 10 • •. _. - Air Temperature Rise Across Electric Heaters•(Degrees F) 6 Ton . 7.5 Ton 2400CFM 3000CFM WSC072AD, AT WSC090AD, AT 14.9 11.9 16.5 13.2 17.8 14.2 22.3 17.8 24.8 19.8 26.6 21.3 29.8 23.8 32.9 26.3 35.4 28.3 kW 11.3 200/50/3 12.5 200/50/3 13.5 200/50/3 16.9 200/50/3 18.8 200/50/3 20.2 200/50/3 22.6 200/50/3 25.0 200/50/3 28.9 200/50/3 33.9 200/50/3 37.5 200/50/3 40.4 200/50/3 NOTE: For minimum design airflow, see performance table for each unit. To calculate temp rise at differrent airflow, use following formula: Temp. Rise (F across Elect Htr = (kW x 3414)/(1.08 x CFM) Stages 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 kW 380V / 415V Voltage Stages 07.5 / 09.0 380-415/50/3 2 10.9 / 13.0 380 - 415/50/3 2 11.3 /13.5 380. 415/50/3 1 14.9 /17.8 11.9 /14.2 14.4 / 17.2 380- 415/50/3 2 -- 16.9 / 20.2 380- 415/50/3 2 22.3 / 26.6 17.8 / 21.3 22.6 / 26.9 380- 415/50/3 2 29.8 / 35.4 23,8 / 28.3 33.8 / 40.4 380 - 415/50/3 2 -- NOTE: For minimum design airflow, see performance table for each unit. To calculate temp rise at differrent airflow, use following formula: Temp. Rise (F across Elect Htr = (kW x 3414)/(1.08 x CFM) Standard Indoor Fan Motor Minimum Maximum Fuse Circuit Size Or Maximum . Ampacitiy Circuit Breaker' 11.3/ 13.5 39/47 1 26.9/28.9 35/35 16.9/20.2 58/ 2 37.5/40.5 40/45 22.6 / 26.9 78 / 92 2 48.3 / 52.1 50 / 60 11.3/13.5 39/47 1 28.1 /30.1 35/35 16.9 /20.2 58/69 2 38.8 /41.8 40/45 22.6/26.9 78/92 2 49.5/53.4 50/60 16.9/20.2 58/69 2 38.8/41.8 40/45 22.6 / 26.9 78 / 92 2 49.5 / 53.4 50 / 60 16.9/20.2 58/69 2 40.9/43.9 45/45 22.6 / 26.9 78 / 92 2 51.6 / 55.5 60 / 60 33.8 / 40.4 116 / 138 2 73.1 / 79.0 80 / 80 15.7 / 18.8 21.0 / 25.0 10 Ton 4000CFM WSC120AD, AT 13.4 14.9 18.0 17.9 19.8 21.3 26.8 29.6 31.9 Air Temperature Rise Across Electric Heaters (Degrees F) 6Ton 7.5 Ton 8.5 Ton 10 Ton 2400CFM 3000CFM 3400CFM 4000CFM TSC072AD TSCO9OAD TSC102AD TSC120AD 13.4 / 16.0 17.9 /21.3 26.7 / 31.9 Oversized Indoor Fan Motor Minimum Maximum Fuse Circuit Size Or Maximum Ampacitiy Circuit Breaker' 28.1 / 30.1 35 / 35 38.8/41.8 40/45 49.5 / 53.4 50 / 60 30.3/32.3 35/35 40.9 /43.9 45/45 51.6 /55.5 60 /60 40.9 / 43.9 45 / 45 51.6'/55.5 60 /60 40.9 /43.9 45/45 51:8 /55.5 •60/60 73.1 /79.0 80/80 Table 11 NOTES: 1. All units to be installed under local codes 2. kW shown for 380V / 415V Table 12 Unit Heater Model No. Model No. 200 Volts Three Phase BAYHTRS318AA WSC072AT BAYHTRS327AA BAYHTRS336AA BAYHTRS318AA WSC090AT BAYHTRS327AA BAYHTRS336AA BAY HiH1327AA WSC120AT BAYHTRT336AA BAYHTRT354AA NOTES: 1. At units to be installed under local codes 2. kW and MBH shown for 200V Standard Indoor Fan Motor Minimum Maximum Fuse Control Circuit Size Or Maximum Stages Ampacitiy Circuit Breaker' Unit Heater Heater Model No. Model No. kW Rating MBH 380/415 Volts Three Phase BAYHTRS418A 11.3 / 13.5 39 / 47 1 43.4 / 45.4 50 / 50 WSC072AD BAYHTRS427A 16.9 / 20.2 58 / 69 2 54.1 / 57.1 60 / 60 BAYHTRS436A 22.6 / 26.9 78 / 92 2 64.8 / 68.7 70 / 70 BAYHTRS418A 11.3 / 13.5 39 / 47 1 46.3 / 48.3 50 / 50 WSC090AD BAYHTRS427A 16.9 / 20.2 58 / 69 2 56.9 / 59.9 60 / 60 BAYHTR5436A 22.6 / 26.9 78 / 92 2 67.7 / 71.6 70 / 70 BAYHTRT427A 16.9 / 20.2 58 / 69 2 63.3 / 66.3 WSC120AD BAYHTRT436A 22.6 / 26.9 78 / 92 2 74.0 / 77.9 BAYH1RT454A 33.9 / 40.4 116 / 138 2 95.5 / 101.4 11 70 / 70 80/80 100 / 110 Oversized Indoor Fan Motor Minimum Maximum Fuse Circuit Size Or Maximum Ampacitiy Circuit Breaker' 44.4 / 46.4 55.1 / 58.1 65.8 / 69.7 48.0 / 50.0 58.6 / 61.6 69.4 / 73.3 50 / 50 60 / 60 70 / 70 50/50 60 / 60 70 / 70 Standard Indoor Fan Motor Oversized Indoor Fan Motor Heater2 Minimum Maximum Fuse Minimum Maximum Fuse Control Circuit Size Or Maximum Circuit Size Or Maximum kW Rating MBH Stages Ampacitiy Circuit Breaker' Ampacitiy Circuit Breaker' 12.5 43 1 86.4 100 89.1 100 18.8 64 2 109.1 110 111.8 125 25.0 85 2 131.5 150 134.2 150 12.5 43 1 92.7 100 95.3 100 18.8 64 2 115.4 125 118.0 125 25.0 85 2 137.8 150 140.4 150 18.8 64 2 127.4 150 25.0 85 2 149.7 150 37.5 123 2 194.9 200 • • linstaHa gi p-ratio n aiinten e PLE O Split System Cooling or Heat Pump Air Handler 5 -20 Tons coD p� ocr o a znoe Model TWE Models (60 Hz) TWE060A * * *E TWE060B * * *E TWE090A* * * E TWE090B * * *E TWE120A * * *F TWE120B * * *E TWE180B * * *E TWE240B * * *F March 2007 Models (50 Hz) TWE050AD * *E TWE075AD * *E TWE100AD * *E TWE100BD * *E TWE155BD * *E TWE200BD * *F RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA SEP 2 3 2008 PERMIT CENTER TWE- SVX03C -EN M01)- 231 Literature Change History TWE- SVX03A -EN (June 2003) Implemented Global Graphics format to IOM. TWE- SVX03B -EN (April 2005) Added capacitor discharge warning. TWE- SVX03C -EN (September 2006) Model number for 200 and 240 went to an "F ". TWE- SVX03C -EN (October 2006) Updated 200 and 240 unit dimensions. Note.., - One,copy ofthis document ships inside,tlie control panel of•each unit and is customer property It must be retained by the unit's maintenance personnel.. This booklet describes proper installation, operation, and maintenance pro,cedurrnes for air cooled' systems` By carefully • revie ying•the'info,Gmation within this manuahand=following the instructions, the risk of improper operation and /or component damage will be minimized. It is important that periodic maintenance be performed to help assure trouble free operation. A maintenance schedule is provided at the end of this manual. Should equipment failure occur, contact a qualified service organization with qualified, experienced HVAC technicians to properly diagnose and repair this equipment. Note: All phases of this installation dust comply with the NATJONAL STATE & LOCAL CODES. In 'addition to local codes,.the installation must tonforrnivith National Electric Code - ANSI /NFPA • , ' .NO..70 LATEST REVISION. Note: Do Not release refrigerant to the atmosphere! If adding or removing refrigerant is required, the service technician must comply with all federal, state, and local laws. Preface and Warnings and Cautions Warnings and Cautions Notice that warnings and cautions appear at appropriate intervals throughout this manual. Warnings are provided to alert installing contractors to potential hazards that could result in personal injury or death, while cautions are designed to alert personnel to conditions that could result in equipment damage. Your personal safety and the proper operation of this machine depend upon the strict observance of these precautions. NOTICE: Warnings and Cautions appear at appropriate sections throughout this manual. Read these carefully. • WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. • CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situations which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices. CAUTION Indicates a situation that may result in equipment or property- damage- only accidents. TWE- SVX03C -EN • • • Contents Model Number Description 4 General Information . 5 Installation Checklist 5 Unit Inspection .. 5 Inspection Checklist .. 5 Unit Dimensions .. .. . 6 Installation . 10 Recommended t'stat wire size . .. 14 Field Wiring . 15 Field Wiring Outdoor /Indoor . .. 22 Warranty .. 27 TWE- SVX03C -EN 3 Model Number Description All products are identified by a multiple- character model number that precisely identifies a particular type of unit. An explanation of the alphanumeric identification code is provided. Its use will enable the owner /operator, installing contractors, and service engineers to define the operation, specific components, and other options for any specific unit. When ordering replacement parts or requesting service, be sure to refer to the specific model number, serial number, and DL number (if applicable) stamped on the unit nameplate. 4 Model Number Description TWE 090 A 123 456 7 DIGITS 1 -3: PRODUCT TYPE TWE = Split System Heat Pump/ Cooling Air Handler DIGITS 4 -6: NOMINAL GROSS COOLING CAPACITY (MBh) 060 = 5 Tons 090= 7' /2Tons 120 =10 Tons 150 = 12 Tons 180 = 15 Tons 240 = 20 Tons DIGIT 7: MAJOR DEVELOPMENT SEQUENCE A = Single B = Dual 1 00 E 8 9 10 11 12 DIGIT 8: ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS 1 = 208 - 230/60/1 3 = 208 - 230/60/3 4 = 460/60/3 W = 575/60/3 D = 380 - 415/50/3 K = 380/60/3 DIGITS 9, 10: FACTORY INSTALLED OPTIONS 00 = Packed Stock DIGITS 11: MINOR DESIGN SEQUENCE Current Design Sequence DIGITS 12: SERVICE DIGIT A = First A TWE- SVX03C -EN • { • • General This manual covers installation of the TWE050, 060, 075, 090,100 and 120A single circuit air handlers and TWE060, 075, 090, 100, 120, 155, 180, 200 and 240B dual circuit air handlers. These air handler models incorporate a single slab coil assembly, improved application flexibility, servicing, maintenance accessibility and an improved accessory line. They are fully convertible, (vertical to horizontal discharge) without field removal or reorientation of the coil assembly. They are shipped ready for horizontal installation. The TWE090A300C, TWE090B300C, TWE120A300D, TWE120B300D models are shipped from the factory wired for 208- 230V/3ph/60 Hz, but may be field converted for 460V /3ph/ 60 Hz applications by changing voltage plug on the motor. For voltage change plug instructions, refer to Figure 9. All units (both single and dual circuit), have one drain pan that can be installed in any one of four positions. This allows for vertical or horizontal applications and right or left exit. Note: The TWE0608, TWE0908, TWE1008, and TWE1208 dual circuit air handlers have a split face coil. When they are installed in either position, the lower half of the coil is designated as "Circuit A" and should always wet first. The TWE155B, TWE180B, TWE200B dual circuit units have a mixed face coil. Note: Note: The TWE050, 060, 075, 090, 100 and 120 air handlers have structural provisions to allow 180 degree rotation of discharge panel /blower assembly at installation. A reversible discharge wiring kit, BAYWRKT001A is available with instructions. TWE- SVX03C -EN General Information Installation procedures should be performed in the sequence that they appear in this manual. Do not destroy or remove the manual from the unit. The manual should remain weather - protected with the unit until all installation procedures are complete. Note: It is not the intention of this manual to cover all possible variations in systems that may occur or to provide comprehensive information concerning every possible contingency that may be encountered during an installation. If additional information is required or if specific problems arise that are not fully discussed in this manual, contact your local sales office. Note: "Warnings" and "Cautions" appear at appropriate places in this manual. Your personal safety and the proper operation of this machine require that you follow them carefully. The Company assumes no liability for installations or servicing performed by unqualified personnel. Installation Checklist An "Installation Checklist" is provided at the end of the installation section of this manual. Use the checklist to verify that all necessary installation procedures have been completed. Do not use the checklist as a substitute for reading the information contained in the manual. Read the entire manual before beginning installation procedures. Unit Inspection Inspect material carefully for any shipping damage. If damaged, it must be reported to, and claims made against the transportation company. Compare the information that appears on the unit nameplate with ordering and submittal data to insure the proper unit was shipped. Available power supply must be compatible with electrical characteristics specified on component nameplates. Replace damaged parts with authorized parts only. Inspection Checklist To protect against loss due to damage incurred in transit, complete the following checklist upon receipt of the unit. [ ] Inspect individual pieces of the shipment before accepting the unit. Check for obvious damage to the unit or packing material. H ] Inspect the unit for concealed damage before it is stored and as soon as possible after delivery. Concealed damage must be reported within 15 days. If concealed damage is discovered, stop unpacking the shipment. Do not remove damaged material from the receiving location. Take photos of the damage if possible. The owner must provide reasonable evidence that the damage did not occur after delivery. [ ] Notify the carrier's terminal of damage immediately by phone and by mail. Request an immediate joint inspection of the damage by the carrier and the consignee. [ ] Notify the sales representative and arrange for repair. Do not repair the unit until the damage is inspected by the carrier's representative. 5 FOD)) AP PAM IMAM DOW NI IOFM VIATICAL tl♦M��7 NOAIZOFT UNIT TAL TO PPIFe INN T TOTAL Mew 000Are I L { r�- {I I� - t1.l ZI � Z OSZ 1 I1 Sri" } �� }��I� }a��7 `J' �L - e 1i.i TINO S mare C°J'f-� G�J))e 1 ryi F21 )� )l f k I I TRI)) IA)))) Ii 1 a f �) { � � ) 5 .! ( . I) Figure 1. RETURN AIR OPENING VERTICAL - HORIZONTAL RETURN OR HORIZONTAL - VERTICAL RETURN RETURN AIR OPENING RETURN AIR OPENING VERTICAL - VERTICAL RETURN ION HORIZONTAL - HORIZONTAL RETURN • PAIR 1 FEALE WED 40 PVC PIPE DRAIN CoNPICTION ICRRIIDTAL CON IGURAT EWE ICRE e A 3) VERTICAL VERTICAL (VERTICAL- RETURN) (HORIZONTAL- RETURN) Unit Dimensions F M1N DISTANCE FOR FILTER REMOVAL GOTH ENDS FILTER P LCT4TN. =TH. AND MIGHT DIMENSIO3 IC N F AC Dl INCLUDE VCESS PANEL E RE PE AELE TRAIN p RA N N E ARC ATTA T UN T DRRAAINHC[ORiCT1IICA MAY 7 ! CDaTALLED d MIKA MX WIT DipTHER Fawn D T. j C . SU R p E I [ DRA F P PE FF,FA7C[ypARENNCOL a 1 ELIMG$ PAN DAA I C Celt E LT. "FOE P►Rf)4IMD OIl. HORIZONTAL (HORIZONTAL- RETURN) • Win FEMALE ECM 40 PVC PIPE DRAIN COaNECMGN VERTICAL COPIGURATIOI (SEE NOTE e A 3) 11 P OO I 17RR H • PAIL DEPTH � • R CTYP. ALL PANELS. Ie.7MN SEE NNE I) 7,,a- IQATER CONTROL T P 3 NM AND SINGLE PRYER ENTRY VIM % . zu . *amour 27-61 HEATER VENTILATION 7 • D0A DUSMNG _L LDV VOLTAGE 0023)0) ENTRA 7 • MA VG1pIDLCUTI e223�I LTNTRANCE HORIZONTAL (VERTICAL - RETURN) KNOCKOUT FOR 30. COPPER LIQUID uNE FIELD CONNECTION WQTH EMUS) IOW= FOR 'Y• O. CLIPPER DICTION LINE FIELD CDDICTIDN CWTH (003) 6 TWE- SVX03C -EN • MODEL A B C D E F G H J K L M TWE050 & 060A 4B' 38" 22' 8' 19 1/2' 26' 15 7/8'14 1 /B' 1 7/8' 42 1/8' 34 5/8' 2 7/8' 1219.2nn965.2nn 311.15nm 558.8mm 203.2mm 495.3mm 660.4mm 403.2mm 358.8mm 47.63mm 1070mm 879.5mm 73.03mm TWE050 & 060B 48' 38' 22' 8' 19 1/2' 26' 16 1/4 1/4' 1 1/8' 42 1/8'34 5/8' 2 7/8' 1219.2nn9652nn 819.2mm 558.8mm 203.2mm 495.3mm 660.4mm 412.8mm 336.6nn 28.58mm 1070mm 879.5mm 73.03mm TWE075 & 09DA 54' 47 1/2' 25' 11 3/4' 22 3/8' 22' 00, 17 3/4' 4" 45 1/4' 36 7/8• 6 5/8' 1371.6nn1206.5nn 1060mm 635mm 298.5mm 568.3mm 558.8nn 450.6mm 101.9mm 1149mm 936.6mm 166.3mm TWE090B 54' 47 1/2' 25' 11 3/4' 22 3/8' 22 ' 20 9/16 6" 2 1 /8' 45 1/4' 36 7/8" 6 5/8' 1371.6nn1206.5nn 1060mm 635mm 298.5mm 568.3mm 558.8mm 521.9mm 407.6mm 54.10mm 1149mm 936.6mm 168.3mm TWE100 E. 120A 54' 63 1/2' 25' 19 3/4' 22 3/8' 22' 0.117 3/4' 4' 45 1/4' 36 7/8' 6 5/8' 1371.6mm1612.9mm 1467mm 635mm 501.7mm 568 inn 558 8nn 450.6mm 101 9mm 1149mm 936.6mm 168 3mm TWE100 & 1203 54' 63 1/2' 25' 19 3/4'22 3/8' 22' 20 9/16 16' 2 1 /8' 45 1/4 7/8' 6 5/8' 1371.6nn1612.9nn 1467mm 635mm 501.7mm 568.3mm 558.8mm 521.9mm 407.6mm 54.10mm 1149mm 936.6mm 168.3nn MODEL N P Q R S T V W X Y Z AA TWEOSD 8. 060A 35 5/8'12 1/4' 34 7/8' 32 1/4' 3 /B' 12 1/2' 7 5/8' 1 1/8' 2' 1 7/8' 904.9mm 311.15nm 885.8mm 819.2mm 9.525mm 317.5mm 193.7mm 28.58mm 50.13nn 47.63nn TWE050 EL 060B 35 5/8' 12 1/4' 34 7/8' 32 1/4' 5/16' 12 1/2' 14 3/4' 11 1/8' 7 5/8' 3/4' 2• 2' 904.9mm 311.15mm 885.8mm 819.2mm 7.938mm 317.5mm 374.7mm 282.6mm 193.7mm 19.05mm 50.8mm 50.Bnn TWE075 & 09DA 45 1/8'16 1/8' 38 1 /8' 41 3/4' 1/2' 16 1/4'" 15' 6 7/8' 1 3/8' 1 3/4' 2' 1146.2mm409.6mm 968.4mm 1060mm 12.7mm 412.8mm 382 2mm 174 6m 34 93nn 44 45nn 51.05mm TWE090B 45 1 /8' 16 1/8' 38 1/8' 41 3/4' 3/8' 16 1/4' 18 3/4' 4' 6 7/8' 1 1/8' 1 3/4' 2 1/8' 1146.2mm409.6mm 968.4mm 1060mm 9.525mm 412.8mm 477. 5mm 356.8mm 174.6mm 28.58mm 44.45mm 54.10mm TWE100 E. 120A 61 1/8'16 1/8' 38 1 /8' 57 3/4' 1/2' 16 1/4' 15' 6 7/8' 1 3/8' 1 3/4' 2' 1552.6mm409 6nn 968.4mm 1467mm 12 7nn 412 8mm 382 2nn 174. 34 93nn 44 45nn 51.05mm TWE100 & 1203 61 1 /8' 16 1/8'38 1/8' 57 3/4' 3/8' 16 1/4' 18 3/4' 14' 6 7/8' 1 1/8' 1 3/4' 2 1 /8' 1552.6mm409.6mm 968.4mm 1467mm 9.525mm 412.8mm 477.5mm 356.8mm 174.6mm 28.58mm 44.45mm 54.10mm • • Unit Dimensions Figure 1. (continued from previous page) TWE- SVX03C -EN PRINTED FROM D669508 7 MODEL APPROXIMATE CORNER WEGHTS TOTAL UNIT WEIGHT VERTICAL HORIZONTAL w1 •2 ♦3 w4 41 *2 •3 114 TWE135 & 1808 165 Ib 74.8 k• 185 M 165 ID 74.8 k• 74.8 k• 165 M 74.8 k• 140 M 168 IA 192 Ib 162 Q 7J.S kk• 660 M 63.5 k• 753 k• 87.1 k• 299.4 k. AB 7 /8 22.2mm DIA I!1 IWOCKDUTS FILTER ACCESS PANEL Figure 2. ACCESS PANEL 1 /2" 292.1mm P N FIG. 1 HORIZONTAL ICE ILING -SUSPE NSIONI U DUCT OPENING RETURN AIR OPENING VERTICAL - HORIZONTAL RETURN OR HORIZONTAL - VERTICAL RETURN z DUCT OPENING RETURN AIR OPENING VERTICAL - VERTICAL RETURN OR HORIZONTAL - HORIZONTAL RETURN VERTICAL (VERTICAL RETURNI OOEL TWE155 & 180B S 35' 689.Umm Y DUCT OPENING AC DUCT OPENING AD DRAW CONNECTION FOR HORIZONTAL CONFIGURATION (SEE NOTE 2 & 31 qL OF KNOCKOUT I TYPI VERTICAL I HOR I ZONT AL RETURNI Unit Dimensions A < IN. FOR FILTER EE MOVAL OTH ENDSI 9 7/ 22.2 mm DIN SPLIT BUSHINGS FOR TON BULBS 2453mm B 54 1393.8mm DUCT OPENING (OUTSIDE( NOTES: 1. LENGTH, WIDTH. AND HEIGHT DIMENSIONS DO NOT INCLUDE 1/2" ACCESS PANEL DEPTH. 2. REMOVABLE DRAIN PAN AND ATTACHED DRAIN CONNECTION MAY BE INSTALLED ON EITHER END OF UNIT IN EITHER THE VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL CONFIGURATION. PLASTIC DRAIN PAN ACCESS PLATE ON THE END OF UNIT OPPOSITE DRAIN CONNECTION MUST BE REMOVED TO SLIDE DRAIN PAN OUT OF UNIT FOR CLEANING. ACCESS PLATE MUST BE RE- INSTALLED AFTER SLIDING DRAIN PAN BACK INTO UNIT. 1. fF PERIODIC DRAIN PAN CLEANING IS REQUIRED, ALLOW ROOM FOR PARTIAL REMOVAL OF PAN ON DRAIN CONNECTION END OF UNA. • `fit' 25.4mm FEMALE SCHED 40 PVC PPE DRAIN CONNECTION VERTICAL CONFIGURATION (SEE NOTE 2 & 31 HORIZONTAL (HORIZONTAL RETURNI 1 /4 31.8mm 11y'!... • , 1 HORIZONTAL (VERT I CAL RETURNI MODEL TWEIS5 & 1808 A 89" 1752.6mm B 791 2018.3m1n C 7 '/07 1. mm D E 314 3m 4L3mm F 26" N6G 0 25 " 638 2mm H 1247 Amm J K SBV4" 1428 8mm 15 " 393 7mm 1992" 495 3mm. M 77k" 1962 ;mm N 13 9mrn P 48" 1219.2mm R 35 f R. ES MI 18' 73 44a 1 4mm AA AB AC AD AE 35 8B .O�mm AF 35' 8�9.Omm DUCT FLANGE 2 (HE KNOCKOUT 2 (NEATER CONTROL AND SINGLE POWER ENTRY WIRES( 7 /6 five DUCT 409.8mm OPENING E (OUTSIDE( 22 . 2 mm MA BUSHING LOW VOLTAGE ENTRANCE 2.Imm PANEL DEPTH (TE ALL PANELS, SEE NOTE 1 I 7/ 221mm DIA KNOCKOUT HIGH VOLTAGE ENTRANCE KNOCKOUT FOR > O.D. COPPER LIQUID LINE FIELD CONNECTION (BOTH ENO3S1 ,9mm KNOCKOUT FOR 31 S COPPER SUCTION LINE FIELD CONNECTION (BOTH ENDS/ PRINTED FROM D666371 REV. 1 8 TWE- SVX03C -EN MODEL A B C 0 E F G H J K L M N P R TW E200B 8 E ?Jiff 92 5/8" 30 1/2 18 7 /B 4 1/ " 28 1 /T 28 1 7/8" 5 1� 10 1/ - 20 7/8" 13____9 /4 1_1&" S0 7/8 39 1/8' TWE240B 8 E 1825.6 mm 2352.7 mm 774.7 mm 479.4 mm 1 14.3 mm 723.9 mm 711 711.2 mm 1� m 1501.8 mm 460.4 mm 530.2 mm 2267 mm 44.45 mm 1292.2 mm 993.8 mm F ILTCR-- ACCESS PANEL AB H • TWE200B 8 E TWE240B 8 E Figure 3. TWE- SVX03C -EN 11 -1/2 ACCE - PANEL AF AA 7 1292.11 DUCT OP NING RETURN AIR OPENING VERTICAL - HORIZONTAL RETURN OR HORIZONTAL - VERTICAL RETURN 11111111111111111: II <- AE U VERTICAL VERTICAL RETURN MODEL 19 1 /B" 993.8 mm FIG. 1 (CC IL ING- SUSPENSION) • !II I' IL AC DUCT OPENING RETURN AIR OPENING VERTICAL - VERTICAL RETURN OR HORIZONTAL - HORIZONTAL RETURN 7 /B 123.8 mm _Y DUCT OPENING It OF KNOCKOUT ITYP) A T DRAIN CONNECTION- HORIZONTAL CONFIGURATION (SEE NOTE 2 8 31 d _ - rAD MIN FOR FILTER REMOVAL (BOTH ENDS) U :O HOT GAS - BYPASS KNOCKOUT BOTH ENDS VERT IC AL HORIZONTAL RETURN Unit Dimensions 9 -1/2 1241.31 DUCT OPENING (OUTS'DE) -\ 1301 11 -3/4 12981 9.1/2 1241 7/8" 122.7 mml UTA SPLIT BUSHING FOR TXV BULBS 125.4 mm( FEMALE SCHED 40 PVC PIPE GRAIN CONNECTION VERTICAL CONFIGURATION (SEE NOTE 2 & 31 NOTES. 1 . MODEL TWE700B B E TWE240B 8 E VERT IC At HORIZONTAL B 113961 HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL RETURN 109 Ihs 49 kg 192 tbs 87 kg 2 -5/8 1671 82 7/8" 2105.0 mm V W Y AA 4 5/8" 1.20 20 1/8 82 7/8" 4 117.5 mm 79.4 mm 511.2 mm 2105.0 mm 117.5 mm NOCKOUT FOR 1 3/8 134.9 mm1 0.0. COPPER SUCTION LINE FIELD CONNECTION IBOTH ENDS) LENGTH. WIDTH. AND HEIGHT DIMENSIONS 00 NOT INCLUDE 1/2 ACCESS PANEL DEPTH. REMOVABLE DRAIN PAN ANC ATTACHEC ORAIN CONNECTION MAY BE INSTALLED ON EITHER END OF UNIT IN EITHER THE VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL CONFIGURATION. PLUS''S DRAIN PAN ACCESS PLATE ON THE END OF UNIT OPPOSITE DRAIN CONNECTION MUST BE REMOVED TO SLIDE DRAIN PAN OUT OF UNIT FOR CLEANING. ACCESS PLATE MUST BE RE- NSTALLED AFTER SLIDING DRAIN PAN BACK INTO UNIT. 3. IF PERIODIC DRAIN PAN CLEANING IS REQUIRED. ALLOW ROOM FOR PARTIAL APPEAR) OF PAN ON DRAIN CONNECTION ENO OF UNIT. AB 123.8 mm APPROXIMAT= CORNER WEIGHT (MASS) At DO 1/9' 511.2 mm #2 262 lbs 119 kg 229 lbs 104 kg AD 379. 4 144. mm .3 154 lbs 70 kg 130 lbs 59 kg U HORIZONTAL VERTICAL RETURN AC #4 262 lbs 119 kg 236 lbs 107 kg TOTAL UNIT WEIGHT 787 Lbs 357 kg 787 lbs 357 kg TOTAL SHIPPING WEIGHT 857 lbs 389 kg 857 Ms 389 kg 16 -1/B 1410,51 DUCT OPEINING E ;OUTSIDE) - (22.2mm) 7/8- DIA KNOCKOUT (HEATER CONTROL AND SINGLE POWER ENTRY WIRES) 1/2" PANEL DEP1H /' - (12.7 mml ;TIP ALI. PANELS. SEE NOTE 1) 7/8 122.2 mml DIA BUSHING LOW VOL1AGE ENTRANCE 7/8 DIA KNOCKOUT 122.2 mm) HIGH VOLTAGE ENTRANCE KNOCKOUT FOR 1/7 112.7 mml 0.D. COPPER LIQUID LINE FIELD C3NNEf T ION (BOTH ENDS) AF AG 79 1/9 J9 -61 993.8 mm 993.8 mm 85.7 mm All 25 I/2 647.7 mm 9 Installation Preparations The final position for the air handler must be dictated by required service access to it, weight distribution over structural supports, and by the locations of electrical, refrigerant and condensate drainage connections. After this is determined, the following preparations should be made. Repositioning Drain Pan These air handlers come with one drain pan that can be installed in any one of four positions; this allows for vertical or horizontal application and right or left condensate line connection. The drain pan can also be easily removed for periodic cleaning. Note: important! All air handlers are shipped with the drain pan installed in the horizontal position and the connection on the left side (as shown in Figure 4). If an alternate position is required, the drain pan should be repositioned before setting the air handler. DRAIN PAN LRATION £RIZON'RL APPLICATION Figure 4. 10 ACCESS PATE ALTERNATE DRAIN R ON PAN LATI P FOR VERTICAL PLICATIAN Installation Process for Drain Pan Relocation 1. Remove the access plate at the opposite end of the drain connection. This plate secures and lifts the back end of the drain pan for sloping. It must be removed before the drain pan can be removed. This is done as follows: a. Remove the screw b. Lift the access plate up c. Pull the plate out. If the drain pan is to be moved to the vertical position also remove the other two access plates. 2. Remove the screw securing the drain pan. a. Lift the pan up b. Slide the pan out 3. Install the drain pan into the new position. a. Slide the drain pan into the opening b. Lift the drain pan up c. Push it in all the way d. Drop it down over the lip of the opening, secure with screw 4. Install the access plate on the opposite end of the drain pain. a. Slide the edge of the access plate under the drain pan b. Lift the access plate and drain pan up c. Push the access plate in d. Drop the access plate down over the lip of the opening, secure with screw. If the drain pan is being moved to the vertical position, install the other access plates over the horizontal position opening. Figure 5. TWE- SVXO3C -EN • Refrigerant Piping Preparation The air handler is designed so that refrigerant piping can enter from either the right or left hand side. It is shipped with the intent that the refrigerant lines will enter from the left hand side. To convert to right hand entry, unbraze the elbow on the suction line and rotate 180° and rebraze. Note: Important! Access to refrigerant lines is limited in all horizontal and some vertical applications. Therefore, refrigerant lines should be stubbed out and temporarily capped prior to setting the air handler. Protect adjacent surfaces from heat damage when brazing in and around the air handler. Caution System Component Damage! These air handlers are shipped with a dry nitrogen holding charge in the coil. Cut the process tube or puncture the cap to bleed off the nitrogen prior to any brazing. Temporarily cap off tubes if the refrigerant line connections are to be made later. Installations, Limitations and Recommendations The general location of the air handler is normally selected by the architect, contractor and /or buyer. For proper installation the following items must be considered. a. Available power supply must agree with electrical data on component nameplate. b. Air Handlers shipped wired for 208 -230 volt applications can be converted for 460 volt by rewiring the blower motor (See Figure 9). c. If external accessories are installed on the unit, additional clearances must be provided. d. All duct work should be properly insulated to prevent condensation and heat loss. e. Refrigerant gas piping must be insulated. TWE- SVX03C -EN Installation Caution System Component Damage! Properly insulate all refrigerant gas piping to prevent possible water damage due to condensation and to prevent capacity loss and possible compressor damage. It is recommended that the outline drawings (pages 3 and 4) be studied and dimensions properly noted and checked against the selected installation site. By noting in advance which knockouts are to be used, proper clearance allowances can be made for installation and possible future service. Note: Important! When installing these units "free standing" with discharge grills and isolators, a top support with isolator should be added to prevent tipping. Support and isolator can be attached to a wall or other appropriate structure. Note: Important! If adding external accessories to the unit, additional clearances must be considered for the overall space needed. For installation of accessories available for this air handler, follow the instructions packed with each accessory. Lifting Recommendations 0 WARNING Improper Unit Lift! Test lift unit approximately 24 inches to verify proper center of gravity lift point. To avoid dropping of unit, reposition lifting point if unit is not level. Failure to properly lift unit could result in death or serious injury or possible equipment or property - only damage. Before preparing the unit for lifting, the center of gravity should be determined for lifting safety. Because of the placement of external components, the unit weight may be unevenly distributed. Approximate total unit weight and corner weights are given in Figure 1- Figure 3. The crated unit can be moved using a forklift of suitable capacity. For lifting the unit into an elevated mounting position, run lifting straps or slings under the unit and attach securely to the lifting device. Use spreader bars to protect the unit casing from damage. Test lift the unit to determine proper balance and stability. Caution Equipment Damage! Use spreader bars to prevent straps from damaging the unit. Install the bars between lifting straps, both underneath the unit and above the unit. This will prevent the straps from crushing the unit cabinet or damaging the unit finish. Horizontal Suspension If the air handler will be suspended, use a suspension mounting kit to isolate the unit from the structure. This is usually accomplished through the use of spring or rubber isolators, which are offered as an accessory. Mounting rods must be field supplied. Isolator selection is dependent upon total unit weight including accessories. Approximate unit weights are provided in Table 1. 11 Caution Equipment Damage! Before hanging the unit on suspension rods, reinforce the cabinet around the knockouts by using a large washer inside the cabinet. Washers should be between the skin of the air handler and the nut on the suspension rod. Align holes (knockouts) in the cabinet with structural supports and secure suspension rods to the structure, then to the air handler cabinet. If knockout locations do not permit proper alignment with existing structure, it may be necessary to field fabricate cross members on existing structural beams. Note: When other than bottom return is to be used, side panel removed for return duct installation must be secured over the bottom opening. Leveling This air handler has a double sloped drain pan. In order to assure proper drainage along the length of the drain pan, it is important to have the unit properly leveled. Be sure the air handler is level or slightly sloped in the direction of the condensate connection. Auxiliary Drain Pan A field fabricated, auxiliary drain pan should be installed under the unit for all horizontal applications and when air handlers are installed above ceilings or in other locations where condensate overflow may cause damage. This drain pan will eliminate any excess condensation that may be due to extreme humidity or an obstructed drain in the primary drain pan. Drain lines from this pan must 12 Installation be installed, but should not be connected to the primary drain line from the unit. Isolate the auxiliary drain pan from both the air handler and the structure. WARNING Fiberglass Wool! Product contains fiberglass wool. Disturbing the insulation in this product during installation, maintenance or repair will expose you to airborne particles of glass wool fibers and ceramic fibers known to the state of California to cause cancer through inhalation. Glass wool fibers may also cause respiratory, skin or eye irritation. Precautionary Measures • Avoid breathing fiberglass dust. • Use a NIOSH approved dust/mist respirator. • Avoid contact with the skin or eyes. Wear long- sleeved, loose - fitting clothing, gloves, and eye protection. • Wash clothes separately from other clothing: rinse washer thoroughly. • Operations such as sawing, blowing, tear -out, and spraying may generate fiber concentrations requiring additional respiratory protection. Use the appropriate NIOSH approved respirator in these situations. First Aid Measures Eye Contact - Flush eyes with water to remove dust. If symptoms persist, seek medical attention. Skin Contact - Wash affected areas gently with soap and warm water after handling. Refrigerant Piping Installation, brazing, leak testing and evacuation of refrigerant lines are covered in the installation instructions packaged with the outdoor unit. Read the instructions before beginning installation of refrigerant lines. Locate cloth bag(s) attached to the refrigerant tube of the coil that contains two (2) brass clamps (straps) and cork impregnated insulation material approximately 9" long by 4" wide. This is for attaching and insulating the expansion valve bulb(s) to the suction line(s). On air handlers that will have refrigerant lines entering the cabinet from the left side, remove the split rubber grommet from the knockout in the end of the air handler. Uncoil the cap tub with the bulb attached at the expansion valve and place the grommet on the cap tube. With the grommet around the tube, push the bulb through the hole and position the grommet back into its original position (one bulb and cap tube on single circuit units and two bulbs and cap tubes on dual circuit units). Attach the bulb(s) approximately 45° off vertical, 10 to 12 inches outside of the air handler. On air handlers that will have refrigerant lines entering the cabinet from the right side, the bulb(s) should be attached to the suction tube(s) inside the cabinet in the same manner as above, approximately 10" from the right end of the unit. After attaching to the suction line(s), either inside or outside of the cabinet, wrap the cork impregnated insulation around the bulb(s) and suction tube(s). Refrigerant piping should be insulated. Note: Important! Ensure that the refrigerant lines passing through the cabinet are not resting on sharp sheet metal edges. Condensate Piping The drain pan condensate connection is a female slip joint type for 1" Schedule 40 PVC pipe. Use PVC cement and tubing as required (field supplied) to construct a trap. A union or flexible tubing and clamps may be installed if the drain pan is to be removed periodically for cleaning. TWE- SVX03C -EN Note: Important! When air handler is installed in the vertical position and close proximity trapping of condensate is required, use of a subbase accessory to raise the air handler for clearance of the drain trap is recommended. See Figure 6 for a typical drain trap assembly II 4' MIN. 2 - 3 /4' M N. Figure 6. Filters Air handlers are shipped with throwaway filters installed. For replacement filters consult the air handler service facts for correct size and number. To replace filters from the end of the unit, remove lower access panel (either end) and slide old filters out and replace with new ones. To replace from the front of the unit, remove one "L" shaped angle. Remove and replace filters and reinstall "L" shaped angle. See Figure 7. FILTER FRAME ANGLE IN V POSITION FILTER FRAME ANGLE IN 2' POSITION "L" SHAPED ANGLE Figure 7. To convert from 1" filter to a 2" filter on units so equipped, remove lower access panels from both ends of the air handler. Remove screws and reposition the "L" shaped angles from both the top and bottom of the TWE- SVX03C -EN MATERIALS 2 EA - TEE 2 EA - 90' ELL 1 EA - PLUG 2 EA - 6'NIPPLE 2 EA - 2 I EA - 1'NPT TO PVC DR COPPER ADAPTER Installation filter track to increase the width of the filter opening. Duct Connections The supply and return ducts should be connected to the unit with flame retardant duct connectors to reduce vibration transmission. The return duct should be sized to the same dimensions as the return inlet of the unit. Note: Important! Duct flanges are provided for attachment of the duct work. On TWE060, 090, and 120 the flanges are not installed but are shipped inside the air handler. While facing the air handler with the control box to your left, remove the upper access panel. The duct flanges will be attached to the belly band of the air handler nearest you. Remove the screws securing flanges in place. Position the four flanges around the supply opening. Secure with field supplied screws, using the predrilled holes. On TWE180 and 240, the duct flanges are packaged on the outside of the cabinet. Air Flow Settings Unit is shipped for nominal airflow with nominal static pressure. Please refer to fan performance table in either the product catalog or unit service facts and select the proper drive package for each application. Failure to do so could result in improper airflow causing coil frosting or condensate management problems. Condensate management problems such as water drip off or water blow off could be the result of too great of air face velocity across the coil. WARNING Hazardous Voltage w /Capacitors! Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects and discharge all motor start/run capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout /tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be inadvertently energized. Verify with an appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors have discharged. Failure to disconnect power and discharge capacitors before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Note: For additional information regarding the safe discharge of capacitors, see PROD- SV806A -EN or PROD- SV806A -FR. 13 Wire Size (Gauge) Maximum Wire Length Physical distance between Unit & T'stat 22 30 Feet 20 50 Feet 18 75 Feet 16 125 Feet 14 200 Feet QWARN{NG Hazardous Voltage! Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Electrical Connections 1. All electrical lines, sizing, protection, and grounding must be in accordance with the National Electric Code and local codes. 2. If conduit is used, isolate whenever vibration transmission may cause a noise problem within the building structure. 3. Ensure all connections are tight and no wires exposed. 4. All accessories must be installed and wired according to the instructions packaged with that accessory. For air handler power entry only, or for dual power entry (power entry for air handler and power entry for electric heats), the electrical connections are made in the fan control box located in the left side of the air handler and electric heater respectively. Wiring entrance is through holes provided in the end of the air handler cabinet, see Figure 8. Breaker or fuse size can be selected using the nameplates attached to the unit and electric heater. See pages 13 through 22 for typical interconnecting wiring diagrams. Table 1. Recommended t'stat wire size 14 Installation Figure 8. HEATER CONTROL AND SINGLE POVER ENTRY HIGH VOLTAGE ENT RA NC Checkout Procedure Complete the following "installation checklist" once installation of field wiring connections is complete. All operational checks (unit running) must be made after the outdoor unit is installed and system interconnection is complete. Installation Checklist Complete this checklist once the unit is i nstalled to verify that all recommended procedures have been accomplished before the system is started. Operational checks cannot be performed until the outdoor unit is installed and system interconnection is complete. • Verify that the unit electrical power is disconnected. • Inspect all field wiring connections. All connections should be clean and tight. • Inspect unit ground connection(s). Ground must comply with all applicable codes. • Inspect unit suspension arrangement (if used). Unit position must be secure. Remove any tools or debris found in or near the unit. • I nspect duct outlets. Outlets must be open and unrestricted. • Inspect unit drain lines. Pipe connections must be tight and drain line unrestricted. • Inspect fan assembly to insure all moving parts move freely. • If unit is horizontally mounted, make sure secondary drain pan has been installed. • Inspect unit for proper filters, securely installed. All cabinet panels must be secure. • Instruct owner /operator on proper system operating and maintenance procedure. VIEW OF TERMINAL END GENERAL ELECTRIC Figure 9. TO CHANGE VOLTAGE PULL SELECTOR PWO OUT SHIFT PLUG TO ALIGN ARROW TO 4E0V FOR HIGH VOLTAGE OR 2S0V FOR LOW VOLTAGE AS DESIRED. PUSH PLUG BACK IN. CONNECT ONES TO 11, L2, LS TO REVERSE ROTATION. INTERCHANGE ANY TWO LAM CONNECTIONS TWE- SVX03C -EN • • • • Thermostat and Control Connections 1. Observe all notes on the diagrams. 2. Mount the thermostat in the desired location. 3. Install color coded low voltage cables between outdoor unit, indoor unit and thermostat. 4. Connect low voltage control wiring to the low voltage terminal board located on the side of the fan control box per the typical interconnecting wiring diagrams on pages 13 through 22. TTA090A /TW E090A TTAl20A /TWE120A Field Wiring: a. 3 power wires. Line voltage. b. 3 power wires. Line voltage for 3 phase; 2 wires for single phase. c. Cooling only thermostat: 3 wires, 24 volts. i. One stage Electric heat: add 1 additional wire, 24 volts. ii. Two Stage Electric heat: add 2 additional wires, 24 volts. d. 4 wires, 24 volts. TWE- SVX03C -EN Field Wiring Disconnect Switch (By others) Figure 10. Electric Heater Accessory Condensing Unit ■ ■ Field Wiring TWA090A /TW E090A TWAl20A /TWE120A e i Field Wiring: a. 3 power wires. Line voltage. b. 3 power wires. Line voltage for 3 phase; 2 wires for single phase. c. Heat pump thermostat: 6 wires, 24 volts. i. Electric heat: add 2 additional wire, 24 volts. d. 6 wires, 24 volts. i. Outdoor thermostat; add 1 additional wire, 24 volts. ii. Electric heat: add 1 additional wires, 24 volts. TTAl20B /TTE120B TTAl20C /TWE120C TTAl20B /TWE120B Field Wiring: a. 3 power wires. Line voltage. b. 3 power wires. Line voltage for 3 phase; 2 wires for single phase. c. Cooling only thermostat: 4 wires, 24 volts. Disconnect Switch (By others) T'stat Disconnect Switch (By others) i. One Stage Electric heat: add 1 additional wire, 24 volts. ii. Two Stage Electric heat: add 2 additional wires, 24 volts. d. 5 wires, 24 volts. TT_060 /TWE060A Field Wiring: a. 3 power wires. Line voltage. b. 3 power wires. Line voltage for 3 phase; 2 wires for single phase. c. Cooling only thermostat: 3 wires, 24 volts. i. One Stage Electric heat: add 1 additional wire, 24 volts. ii. Two Stage Electric heat: add 2 additional wires, 24 volts. d. 2 wires, 24 volts. TW_060A /TWE060A Field Wiring: a. 3 power wires. Line voltage for 3 phase; 2 wires for single phase. 15 b. 3 power wires. Line voltage for 3 phase; 2 wires for single phase. c. Heat pump thermostat: 6 wires, 24 volts. i. Electric heat: add 2 additional wire, 24 volts. d. 2 wires, 24 volts. i. Outdoor thermostat; add 1 additional wire, 24 volts. ii. Electric heat: add 1 additional wire, 24 volts. (2) TT_060 /TTE120B (2) TT_060 /TWE120B (2) TT_030 /TWE060B Field Wiring: a. 3 power wires. Line voltage for 3 phase; 2 wires for single phase. b. 3 power wires. Line voltage for 3 phase; 2 wires for single phase. c. Cooling only thermostat: 4 wires, 24 volts. i. One Stage Electric heat: add 1 additional wire, 24 volts. ii. Two Stage Electric heat: add 2 additional wires, 24 volts. d. 2 wires, 24 volts to outdoor section A. i. 2 wires, 24 volts to outdoor section B. Field Wiring (2) TW_030 /TWE060B (2) TW_060 /TWE120B Field Wiring: a. 3 power wires. Line voltage for 3 phase; 2 wires for single phase. b. 3 power wires. Line voltage for 3 phase; 2 wires for single phase. c. Heat pump thermostat: 7 wires, 24 volts. i. Electric heat: add 2 additional wire, 24 volts. d. 5 wires, 24 volts to outdoor section A. i. 2 wires, 24 volts to outdoor section B. ii. 2 wires, 24 volts between outdoor sections A and B. iii. Outdoor thermostat; add 1 additional wire, 24 volts. iv. Electric heat: add 1 additional wires, 24 volts. 16 TWE- SVX03C -EN • • TO POWER SUPPLY PER LOCAL CODES PER LOCAL CODES O Ti. I- • w B1• —L• • O 02• 1 i7, I- 0 OUTDOOR Figure 11. TTA090A, 120A /TWE090A, 120A; TTA075A, 100A /TWE075A, 100A Z B1• 0 1782• TO SINGLE OR THREE PHASE POWER SUPPLY l IX • 1 j 0 Y2• fi 0 R• R• OUTDOOR —L• �Y 1 •J-- INDOOR NOTES: INDOOR NOTES: Field Wiring TTA075A- 120A/TWE075A -120A FIELD SUPPLIED JUMPER NOTE 3 THERMOSTAT (TYPICAL MANUAL CHANGEOVER) RH RC Y G W1 W2 • • • • 1. IF TWO STAGE ELECTRIC HEATERS AND THERMOSTAT ARE USED REMOVE THE JUMPER BETWEEN W1 AND W2. 2. FOR SINGLE STAGE ELECTRIC HEATER OMIT WIRE BETWEEN W2 AND THERMOSTAT AND W2 AND ELECTRIC HEATER. 3. FOR COOLING ONLY OMIT WIRES BETWEEN W1,W2 AND THERMOSTAT AND OMIT ELECTRIC HEATER. 4. WHEN ELECTRIC HEATER ACCESSORY IS USED SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OR DUAL POINT POWER ENTRY IS FIELD OPTIONAL. SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OPTION IS THROUGH ELECTRIC HEATER ONLY. FIELD SUPPLIED JUMPER THERMOSTAT (TYPICAL MANUAL CHANGEOVER) RH RC Ti Y2 G Wt W2 t • •, -._ • • NOTE 3 1. IF TWO STAGE ELECTRIC HEATERS AND THERMOSTAT ARE USED. REMOVE THE JUMPER BETWEEN WI AND W2. 2. FOR SINGLE STAGE ELECTRIC HEATER OMIT WIRE BETWEEN W2 AND THERMOSTAT AND W2 AND ELECTRIC HEATER. 3. FOR COOLING ONLY OMIT WIRES BETWEEN WI,W2 AND THERMOSTAT AND OMIT ELECTRIC HEATER. 4. WHEN ELECTRIC HEATER ACCESSORY IS USED SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OR DUAL POINT POWER ENTRY IS FIELD OPTIONAL. SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OPTION IS THROUGH ELECTRIC HEATER ONLY. S. THESE CONNECTIONS ARE FOR 3 PHASE UNITS ONLY. B. THE TWE120A UNIT DOES NOT HAVE A "Y2" TERMINAL. NOTE r r _ 2 0 w Q fi 1 - • IYw CS tin WwU • W1 •G W2 \• Y -• B1 B2 /• R L_ 5 � H L----i- W N fi 1 PRINTED FROM C756881 W • O - TO SINGLE OR THREE PHASE • I.1-N •-F- POWER SUPPLY O 4 W PER LOCAL CODES • W=< • NOTE 4 ,1 -• J W1 NOTE I C I NOTE 2 W2 I . Aril Y1 • Y2 • B1 Jam .■ B2 I r 1 ) L oI- W fi • TO POWER SUPPLY • PER LOCAL CODES NOTE 4 e_ 1 • TO SINGLE OR THREE PHASE • POWER SUPPLY PER LOCAL CODES • 1 — NOTE 4 1 21C756882P02 TO POWER SUPPLY PER LOCAL CODES NOTE 4 Figure 12. TTAl20B /TWE120B; TTAl20C /TWE120A; TTA100B /TWE100B; TTA100C /TWE100A TWE- SVX03C -EN 17 PURER SUPPLY PER LOCAL CODES B1 F 6 B2• Y • bi R • 1a0 • H O BI• f i 82• TO PORCH SUPPLY I^ Y 1 • PER LOCAL CODES • 1 I o Y2• ° R • OUTDOOR OUTDOOR THERMOSTAT ACCESSORY OUTDOOR I INDOOR J: R INDOOR I FIELD SUPPLIED JUMPER BAY2445042 � O R 0 G Y W X2 B T _- ��--- - -• —�- NOTES: 1. REMOVE JUMPER BETWEEN WI AND W2 IF C07 ACCESSORY IS USED. 2. WHEN ELECTRIC HEATER ACCESSORY IS USED SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OR DUAL POINT POWER ENTRY IS FIELD OPTIONAL. SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OPTION IS THROUGH ELECTRIC HEATER ONLY. Field Wiring THERMOSTAT (TYPICAL) THERMOSTAT ITYP ICAL AUTO CHANGEOVER RH RC Y1 Y2 G WI W2 NOTES: 1. IF TWO STAGE ELECTRIC HEATERS AND THERMOSTAT ARE USED REMOVE THE JUMPER BETWEEN WI AND W2. 2. FOR SINGLE STAGE ELECTRIC HEATER OMIT WIRE BETWEEN W2 AND THERMOSTAT AND HIS AND ELECTRIC HEATER, 3. FOR COOLING ONLY OMIT WIRES BETWEEN WI ,W2 AND THERMOSTAT AND OMIT ELECTRIC HEATER. 4, WHEN ELECTRIC HEATER ACCESSORY IS USED SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OR DUAL POINT POWER ENTRY IS FIELD OPTIONAL. SINGLE POINT POKER ENTRY OPTION 19 THROUGH ELECTRIC HEATER ONLY. 5. THESE CONNECTIONS ARE FOR 3 PRASE UNATS ONLY. Tit t TWEI2OA UNIT DOES NOT HAVE A Y2 TERMINAL. J•. W 1 � � P LOCAL CODES SUPPLY PER OW • - NOTE 2 ` I I NOTE I J• W2 ' 1 / • B1 r _ � ( • G 0 I T h. Y NOTE 3 _ Y • —NO H i i ` PORED SUPPLY • W IU 8 I PER LOCAL CODES JS • • W < J • R T 2 I I I I I L -- • 0 L-- -- W 0 U 21C756884P02 Figure 13. TWA090A, 120A/TWE090A, 120A; TWA075A, 100A/TWE075A, 100A • U CWVM _ I �� TO POWER SUPPLY • 1-1-0, T PER LOCAL CODES 8W NOTE 4 JI TO POKER SUPPLY y >• W1 •--- PER LOCAL CODES NOTE 1 C NOTE 4 NOT 2 • W2 ,ft-'74 • G i• Y1 ` CiJ E V Y2 . IS Z L I er - - - W N I 21C756886P02 Figure 14. TTAl20B /TWE120B; TTAl20C/TWE120A; TTA100B /TWE100B; TTA100C /TWE100A 18 TWE- SVX03C -EN • Figure 15. OUTDOOR °Y1• 1-(:71.45 y 81 • TO POWER SUPPLY PER LOCAL CODES B2 • O • = " O R OUTD 0 0 TO SINGLE OR ---1 - : ;----1 N B • POWER PHASE POWER SUPPLY -1-411 PER LOCAL CODES 0 y H — G j !i7 8 0 INDOOR BAY24X042 NOTES: I. ARE TWO REMOVE HECJU HEATERS AND WIIANDAW2. PRINTED FROM C 7 56 887 2. FOR SINGLE STAGE ELECTRIC HEATER OMIT WIRE BETWEEN NO AND THERMOSTAT AND NO AND ELECTRIC HEATER. 3. FOR COOLING ONLY OMIT WIRES BETWEEN WI.N2 AND THERMOSTAT AND OMIT ELECTRIC HEATER. 4. WHEN ELECTRIC HEATER ACCESSORY IS USED SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OR DUAL POINT POWER ENTRY IS FIELD OPTIONAL. SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OPTION IS THROUGH ELECTRIC HEATER ONLY. TTA090A, 120A /TWE090A, 120A; TTA075A, 100A /TWE075A, 100A INDOOR BAY24X042 FIELD SUPPLIED JUMPER FIELD SUPPLIED JUMPER L_ Figure 16. TW_060 /TWE060; TW_050 /1WE050 Field Wiring THERMOSTAT ( (TYPICAL AUTO CHANGEOVER) I I RH RC Y C WT W2 RH • • • • THERMOSTAT (TYPICAL AUTO CHANGEOVER) I I RH RC Y G W1 W2 • .L. • • NOTES NOTES: 1. IF TWO STAGE ELECTRIC HEATERS AND THERMOSTAT ARE USED, REMOVE THE JUMPER BETWEEN WI AND W2. 2. FOR SINGLE STAGE ELECTRIC HEATER OMIT WIRE BETWEEN NO AND THERMOSTAT AND NO AND ELECTRIC HEATER. 3. FOR COOLING ONLY OMIT WIRES BETWEEN WI,W2 AND THERMOSTAT AND OMIT ELECTRIC HEATER. 4. IF THE EDC SWITCH IS TO BE CONNECTED IN THE CIRCUIT, THE EDC WIRE MUST BE REMOVED FROM THE 81 TERMINAL AND RECONNECTED TO THE Y TERMINAL ON THE INDOOR SECTION LOW VOLTAGE TERMINAL BOARD AS SHOWN. 5. WHEN ELECTRIC HEATER ACCESSORY IS USED SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OR DUAL POINT POWER ENTRY IS FIELD OPTIONAL. SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OPTION IS THROUGH ELECTRIC NEATER ONLY. NOTE 3 I • V ) • �� 1 TO POWER SUPPLY 11-1— PER LOCAL CODES LI NOTE • W _ w < )• WI NOTE IC NOTE 2 W2 r r • - TO SINGLE OR —1- lacy THREE PHASE . - POWER SUPPLY PER LOCAL CODES j = 0 NOTE 5 —• w < rFi - J y W1 NOTE 1 C NOTE 2 X W2 • NOTE 14 T, B1 -. 1s• B2 f • R 0 U C1 H L - --- CO C )• 81 A 82 A R oI z I 0 H 0 N 8 1 I21C756888P02 r TO POWER SUPPLY • - F — PER LOCAL CODES NOTE 4 • _.� TO SINGLE OR THREE PHASE 0 - 1 — POWER SUPPLY PER LOCAL CODES • NOTE 5 TWE- SVX03C -EN 19 TO SINGLE OR THREE PHASE POWER SUPPLY PER LOCAL CODES B 0 — _Y I- TO SINGLE OR N R • THREE MUSE �• Pgl[R OCAL R CW[S �• Q 0 • I T 02 OUTDOOR NDOOR I FIELD SUPPLIED JUMPER Figure 17. TW_060/TWE060; TW_050 /TWE050 OUTDOOR INDOOR ODT o--- -- T OSTAT ACCESSORY Figure 18. TW_060/TWE060; TW_050 /TWE050 Field Wiring THERMOSTAT (TYPICAL MANUAL CHANGEOVER) RH RC Y G W1 W2 • • NOTE 3 THERMOSTAT I TYPICAL) I 1 1 1 R 0 G Y W 02 B T �t �_• • - = -9— NOTE I NOTES: 1. IF TWO STAGE ELECTRIC HEATERS AND THERMOSTAT ARE USED, REMOVE THE JUMPER BETWEEN W1 AND W2. 2. FOR SINGLE STAGE ELECTRIC HEATER OMIT WIRE BETWEEN W2 AND THERMOSTAT AND W2 AND ELECTRIC HEATER. 3. FOR COOLING ONLY OMIT WIRES BETWEEN WI „W2 AND THERMOSTAT AND OMIT ELECTRIC HEATER. 4. IF THE EDC SWITCH IS TO OE CONNECTED IN THE CIRCUIT, THE EDC WIRE MUST BE REMOVED FROM THE BI TERMINAL AND RECONNECTED TO THE Y TERMINAL ON THE INDOOR SECTION LOW VOLTAGE TERMINAL BOARD AS SHOWN. 5. WHEN ELECTRIC HEATER ACCESSORY IS USED SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OR DUAL POINT POWER ENTRY IS FIELD OPTIONAL. SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OPTION IS THROUGH ELECTRIC HEATER ONLY. NOTES: 1. REMOVE JUMPER BETWEEN N1 AND NO IF ODT ACCESSORY IS USED. 2. IF THE CDC SWITCH IS TO BE CONNECTED IN THE B1 TERMINAL A NO C RECONNE�CTED B TO THE YTERMINAAL ON THE A 9 DOORgRT1SECTION LON VOLTAGE TERMINAL S. 3. YMEN ELECTRIC HEATER ACCESSORY IS USED SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OR DUAL POINT POWER ENTRY IS FIELD OPTIONAL. SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OPTION IS THROUGH ELECTRIC NEATER ONLY. FICA RATE >)- d' W IAA { T THREE N PHASE R ,-. • ` J ( > PAYER SUPPLY PER LOCAL CODES J 5 F. NOTE S w a J W1 W2 G Y • B1 -• 82 • R I ` —_ . or_ I W a— TO SINGLE OR THREE PHASE 5— POWER SUPPLY PER LOCAL CODES I NOTE S 6 I- W 0 I 21C756889P02 D:W 7 TO SI PI U S E R W N • ' . I — °» » M L CODE9 y W N •— TO SINGLE OR TWEE PRA WI H- POWER SUPP PER LOCAL CODES 1 *A--- NOTE 3 121C756890P021 20 TOE- SVX03C -EN TO SINGLE OR THREE PHASE 8 POWER SUPPLY � PER LOCAL CODES ._„_,N3: Y� TO SINGLE OR THREE PHASE , POWER SUPPLY PER LOCAL CODES (_ :_.F.E-10 4. Y. I I YF TWE- SVX03C -EN rc o_ BMr OUTDOOR INDOOR g0 11 POAER SUPPLY I_O F< 1 PER LOCAL CODES Y•I TO SINGLE OR THREE PHASE az TO SINGLE OR o - B• — THREE PHASE POWER SUPPLY F o � PER LOCAL CODES ON Y61 OUTDOOR INDOOR FIELD 1 SUPPLIED JUMPER THERMOSTAT (TYPICAL MANUAL CHANGEOVER) RH RC Y1 Y2 G WI W2 • • • NOTES: 1. IF TAO STAGE ELECTRIC HEATERS AND THERMOSTAT ARE USED, REMOVE THE JUMPER BETWEEN WI AND W2. 2. FOR SINGLE STAGE ELECTRIC HEATER OMIT WIRE BETWEEN W2 AND THERMOSTAT AND W2 AND ELECTRIC HEATER. 3. FOR COOLING ONLY OMIT WIRES BETWEEN WI,W2 AND THERMOSTAT AND OMIT ELECTRIC HEATER. {. IF THE EDC SWITCH IS TO BE CONNECTED IN THE CIRCUIT, THE EDC WIRE MUST BE REMOVED FROM THE 131 TERMINAL AND RECONNECTED TO THE Y1 TERMINAL ON THE INDOOR SECTION LOW VOLTAGE TERMINAL BOARD AS SHOWN. S. WHEN ELECTRIC HEATER ACCESSORY IS USED SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OR DUAL POINT POWER ENTRY IS FIELD OPTIONAL. SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OPTION IS THROUGH ELECTRIC HEATER ONLY. S. THE CONTROL TRANSFORMER IS FACTORY INSTALLED IN THE TTE120B100, TWEI20B100, AND TWE0008 UNITS. FIELD SUPPLIED - JUMPER BAY2{00 {2 Field Wiring NOTE 4 THERMOSTAT (TYPICAL AUTO CHANGEOVER) RH RC YI Y2 C W1 202 if • • • 9_t__ L NOTE 3 NOTES: 1. IF TWO STAGE ELECTRIC HEATERS AND THERMOSTAT ARE USED, REMOVE THE JUMPER BETWEEN WI AND N2. FOR SINGLE STAGE ELECTRIC HEATER OMIT WIRE BETWEEN W2 AND THERMOSTAT AND W2 AND ELECTRIC HEATER. 3. FOR COOLING ONLY OMIT WIRES BETWEEN WI.N2 AND THERMOSTAT AND OMIT ELECTRIC HEATER. IF THE EDC SWITCH IS TO BE CONNECTED IN THE CIRCUIT TIE EDC WIRE MUST BE REMOVED FROM THE B1 TERMINAL AND RECONNECTED TO THE 71 TERMINAL ON THE INDOOR SECTION LOW VOLTAGE TERMINAL BOARD AS SHOWN. S. WHEN ELECTRIC HEATER ACCESSORY IS USED SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OR DUAL POINT POWER ENTRY IS FIELD OPTIONAL. SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OPTION IS THROUGH ELECTRIC HEATER ONLY. R. THE CONTROL TRANSFORMER IS FACTORY INSTALLED IN THE TTE1208100,TWE1208100.AND TWEODOB UNITS. • C L OT 1 THREE PHASE TO SINGLE 4aW •- POWER SUPPLY PER LOCAL CODES _ ro • NOTE S • TO SINGLE OR THREE PHASE AT • POWER SUPPLY •� NOTE LOCAL CODES Al l G 4.• Y1 p I Y2 W 10 1 �.• 82 222 NOTE S 21C756891P03 Figure 19. TW_ 030 /TWE060B; TW /TWE090B; TW_060 /TWE120B; TW_050 /TWE100B • u > TO ¢w 1 T HRE E E G PARS E J > POWER SUPPLY PER LOCAL CODES �i U •-� NOTE S • W < 7• WI NOTE I C NOTE 2 W2 (NOTE 4 Y1 * BT Y2 �• 02 • !7 • uu o � L A W •-- TO SINGLE OR THREE PHASE W POWER SUPPLY PER LOCAL CODES •-f NOTE S NOTE S I 21C756893P03 Figure 20. TW_ 030 /TWE060B; TW /TWE090B; TW_060 /TWE120B; TW_050 /TWE100B 21 Disconnect Switch (By others) Electric Heater Accessory Condensing Unit Field Wiring 00r Disconnect Switch (By others) Figure 21. Field Wiring Outdoor /Indoor Wiring shown with dashed lines is to be furnished and installed by the customer. All customer - supplied wiring must be copper only and must conform to NEC and local electrical codes. Codes may require line of sight between the disconnect switch and the unit. Note: When electric heater accessory is used, single point power entry or dual point power entry is field optional. Single point power entry option is through the electric heater only. Note: 22 T'stat Disconnect Switch (By others) TTA150B /TWE150B TTA180B /TWE180B TTA240B /TWE240B TTA180C /TWE180B Field Wiring: a. 3 power wires. Line voltage. b. 3 power wires. Line voltage for 3 phase; 2 wires for single phase. c. Cooling only thermostat: 4 wires, 24 volts. i. One Stage Electric heat: add 1 additional wire, 24 volts. ii. Two Stage Electric heat: add 2 additional wires, 24 volts. d. 5 wires, 24 volts. TWA180B /TWE180B TWA240B /TWE240B Field Wiring: a. 3 power wires. Line voltage. b. 3 power wires. Line voltage for 3 phase; 2 wires for single phase. c. Heat pump thermostat: 7 wires, 24 volts. i. Electric heat: add 2 additional wire, 24 volts. d. 7 wires, 24 volts. i. Outdoor thermostat; add 1 additional wire, 24 volts. ii. Electric heat: add 4 additional wires, 24 volts. TTA090A /TWE180B TTAl20A /TWE240B Field Wiring: a. 3 power wires. Line voltage. b. 3 power wires. Line voltage for 3 phase; 2 wires for single phase. c. Cooling only thermostat: 4 wires, 24 volts. i. One Stage Electric heat: add 1 additional wire, 24 volts. ii. Two Stage Electric heat: add 2 additional wires, 24 volts. d. 6 wires, 24 volts. (2) TWA090A /TWE180B (2) TWAl20A /TWE240B Field Wiring: a. 3 power wires. Line voltage. b. 3 power wires. Line voltage. c. Heat pump thermostat: 7 wires, 24 volts. i. Electric heat: add 2 additional wire, 24 volts. d. 9 wires, 24 volts. i. Outdoor thermostat; add 3 additional wire, 24 volts. ii. Electric heat: add 2 additional wires, 24 volts. TWE- SVX03C -EN • TO POWER SUPPLY PER LOCAL CORES OUTDOOR TTA150B, -1808, -2400 �o R • uUWi Y1• — . • • 8Y2• 0 81 • i o B2• I L_ I TTAISOB, -1500, -2400 OUTDOOR INDOOR <)/�• II , TO PO SW PLY \ 1 Y2 •� --"' PER LOCAL CONES l rh - 02N L B2• I TTA150B- 1808- 2408 /TWE1808-2408 TTA180C /TWE180B INDOOR FIELD SUPPLIED JUMPER NOTES: Field Wiring TYPICAL MANUAL CHANGEOVER OR PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT RC RH Y1 Y2 G W1 W2 • • • • I. IF TWO STAGE ELECTRIC HEATERS AND THERMOSTAT ARE USED, REMOVE THE JUMPER BETWEEN W/ AND W2. 2. FOR SINGLE STAGE ELECTRIC HEATER OMIT WIRE BETWEEN W2 AND THERMOSTAT AND W2 AND ELECTRIC NEATER. 3. FOR COOLING ONLY OMIT WIRES BETWEEN WI,W2 AND THERMOSTAT AND OMIT ELECTRIC HEATER. WHEN ELECTRIC HEATER ACCESSORY IS USED SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OR DUAL POINT POWER ENTRY IS FIELD OPTIONAL. SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OPTION IS THROUGH ELECTRIC HEATER ONLY. WHEN ELECTRIC HEATER ACCESSORY IS USED A FIELD SUPPLIED JUMPER MUST BE PLACED BETWEEN 81" AND "B0" ON THE INDOOR SECTION LOW VOLTAGE TERMINAL BOARD. Figure 22. TTA150B, 180B, 240B/TWE180B, 240B; TTAl25B, 155B, 200B /TWE155B, 200B; TTA155C /TWE155B; TTA180C /TWE180B TYPICAL AUTO CRANGEOVER THERMOSTAT 1 1 RC RH Y1 Y2 G W1 W2 FIELD SUPPLIED JUMPER NOTES: 1, IF 150 STAGE ELECTRIC HEATERS NC THERMOSTAT ARE USED. REW°VE THE JAPER BETWEEN WI AND W2, 2. FOR SINGLE STAGE ELECTRIC HEATER WIT WIRE BETWEEN W2 AND TNERIWSTAT AND W2 AND ELECTRIC NEATER. 3. FOR COOLING ONLY WIT WIRES BETWEEN TOM AND THERMOSTAT AND WIT ELECTRIC NEATER. N. WEN ELECTRIC NEATER ACCESSORY IS USED SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OR DUAL POINT POWER ENTRY IS FIELD OPTIONAL. SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OPTION IS THROUGH ELECTRIC NEATER ONLY. S. WHEN ELECTRIC HEATER ACCESSORY IS USED A " 51 6 ° AMA BY ° O N TER INDOOR LON BETWEEN VOLTAGE TERMINAL BOARD. E. BAY24 %012 RELAY IS AN ACCESSORY AND RUST BE ORDERED SEPARATELY. BAY245042 I 1 • G TWE1800. -2408 ,• 82 02 t G I21C756798P02 • W2 •1- 1 W1 g I § I 21C756883P02 TO POWER SUPPLY PER LOCAL CODES TO POWER UPP-Y PER LOCAL S CODES TWEIROB. -2403 • f!.. TO POSER SUPPLY • W <W T PER LOCAL CONES • IT • 1 fi J • , TO POSER SUPPLY PER LOCAL CODES Figure 23. TTA150B, 180B, 240B /TWE 180B, 240B; TTAl25B, 155B, 200B /TWE155B, 200B; TTA155C /TWE155B; TTA180C /TWE180B TWE- SVX03C -EN 23 TO POWER SUPPLY PER LOCAL CODES TO POLAR SUPPLY PER LOCAL COWS TWA1800. -2408 L I [—Wit Rx• W z 01• I 2 I --✓-• u x2• I o• _e-• S Y1• 3 1 Irh R • I 82• I I T •-j L _ Y2 ,WA000A. -1200 g R • �'r N r • W • Ole 82• TIMW00. -ISM I —� L C I \ '� -T. R • .ni r • 1 W • .1 Y}T 11 "rIT[°.NIRTRT ACf254OTY ToPTIDNUI OUTDOOR INEEOR BAYSTATOSSA OUTDOOR THERMOSTAT ACCESSORY (OPTIONAL) Field Wiring OUTDOOR I NOOOR NOTES: 1 THERMOSTAT R ACCESSORY IS USED. 2. WHEN ELECTRIC HEATER ACCESSORY IS USED SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OR DUAL POINT POWER ENTRY IS FIELD OPTIONAL. SINGLE POINT ENTRY OPTION IS THROUGH ELECTRIC HEATER ONLY. TYPICAL THERMOSTAT R YI B W Y2 0 0 E2 TYPICAL THERMOSTAT Y2 R 0 G Y1 W1 X2 B T Figure 24. TWA180B, 2408 /TWE 180B, 240B; TWA155B, 200B /TWE 155B, 200B Y2 0 0 SAYZARM2 •AY21SOL2 2 TNL,00P. -2000 • TTpp ¢WpL `} PER LM.AL C00F CD N 7 2 SUPPLY KO L000L COWS 82 - • a IC768908P02) Figure 25. TWA 090A, 120A /TWE 180B, 240B; TWA075A, 100A /TWE 155B, 200B TWE 1800. -2.08 a • —I • 1 1 00 • ti ~~ W z •G c NOTES( 1. ROOK TM ARP. MIEN WI AND RI IF OOIOOOI 2. M[N ELECTRIC ACCESSORY CCCESPOINT S1 YI IS �S pUESED SINGLE POINT FIELLD R ENTRY IMLA POINT POISE EN ENTRY IS IS MOO. TRIO NEATER HRY 3. PACTOIY Kw10FO AMG WMn • DI' MD • WE' MIST DEPT PLACE THIS UMIr A. u LRU S IN RELAr IE ON M ACWSfaAr ITn MD MST EE OM[Ri. SEIARATFLY. TO POWER SUPPLY PER LOCAL CODES TO PORES SUPPLY PER LOCAL CODES 24 TWE- SVX03C -EN • S TO POWER SUPPLY PER LOCAI. CODES TTAOIOA -120A •g R • • Y1 rg e1. = TTAOII0A. -120A OUTDOOR INDOOR •oi R� TO POWER SUPPLY PER LOCAI, CODES { w ri• 1 , 01• � B2• m - 0JTOCCR TTR099A_ 120A _�E O R • TO POWER SUPPLY ��• F PER LOCH. CODES _N N Y1. $ ?$ 8 2• TTM190A. - 120A R • TO POWER SUPPLY PER LOCA. CODES 9 a Y1. 1 ---r }, g B 7• I k 82• n FII EE.D SUPPLIED JUMPER INDOOR Field Wiring TYPICAL MANUAL CHANGEODVE 1 OR PROORAMMABLE THERMOSTAT I RC RH Y1 Y2 G 1111 W2 Z • • Z— TYPICAL AUTO CHANOEOPER THERMOSTAT RC RH Y1 Y2 t: W1 W2 � FIELD •• SUPPLIED JUMPER r2 Q IBAY24 %042 BAY2UOO4B BAY2A%042 1•R r 9 W1 E G 0 , BS I L= Figure 26. TTA090A, 120A /TWE 180B, 240B; TTA075A, 100A/TWE155B, 240B Figure 27. TTA090A, 120A /TWE 180B, 240B; TTA075A, 100A /TWE155B, 200B TEE IBOB. -2808 O:l 8 O TO POWER SUPPLY PER LIMCAL CODES w 4 a B1 82 • J 1 02 • WW1 • IG • Hex I01 • • 182 • Ot TO POWER SUPPLY PER LOCAL CODES a 1WE11B0B. -2418 NOTES: 1. IF 100 STAGE ELECTRIC HEATERS AND THERMOSTAT ARE USED. REMOVE THE JUMPER BETWEEN WI AND W2. 2. FOR SINGLE STAGE ELECTRIC HEATER CHIT WIRE BETWEEN W2 AND THERMOSTAT AND W2 AND ELECTRIC NEATER. J. FOR COOLING ONLY OMIT WIRES BETWEEN 01.02 ME THERMOSTAT AND OMIT ELECTRIC HEATER. 4. WHEN ELECTRIC HEATER ACCESSORY IS USED SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OR DUAL POINT POWER ENTRY IS FIELD OPTIONAL. SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OPTION IS THROUGH ELECTRIC NEATER ONLY. O. WHEN ELECTRIC HEATER ACCESSORY IS USED A FIELD SUPPLIED JUMPER MUST BE PLACED BETWEEN 81 AND '80 ON THE INDOOR SECTION LOW VOLTAGE TERMINAL BOARD. B. FACTORY PROVIDED JUMPER BETWEEN '81" AND '02' MUST BE LEFT IN PLACE ON THIS UNIT. T. BAY24 %042 RELAY IS AN ACCESSORY ITEM AND MUST BE ORDERED SEPARATELY. • > NJ S•— [rc -11 TO POWER SUPPLY <W �•�If�— PER LOCAL CODES ua 11 a TO POWER SUPPLY - I' PER LOCAL CODES CI NOTES: 1. IF TWO STAGE ELECTRIC HEATERS AND THERMOSTAT U 8 ARE USED. REMOVE THE JUMPER BETWEEN WI AND W2. 1 2. FOR SINGLE STAGE ELECTRIC HEATER OMIT WIRE O BETWCEN W2 AND THERMOSTAT AND W2 MID ELECTRIC HEATER. J. FOR COOLING ONLY OMIT WIRES BEAKER W1.W2 AND O THERMOSTAT AND OMIT ELECTRIC HEATER. 4. WHEN ELECTRIC HEATER ACCESSORY IS USED SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OR DUAL POINT POWER ENTRY IS FIELD OPTIONAL. SINGLE POINT POWER ENTRY OPTION IS THROUGH ELECTRIC NEATER ONLY. S. WHEN ELECTRIC HEATER ACCESSORY IS USED A B 8% 0 ON THE 111000R VOLTAGE TERMINAL BOARS. B. FACTORY PROVIDED JUMPER BETWEEN "B1" AND "82" MUST BE LEFT IN PLACE ON THIS UNIT. T. BAT240042 RELAY IS AN ACCESSORY ITEM AND MUST BE ORDERED SEPARATELY. TWE- SVX03C -EN 25 F. 1 0 1 To VL. OII f R R �E T TI ...mr ITS_ IER S LOGLL mxa O • I 7IL � 7 • x2 ` I 4Y • I '71 I1 TO EINCL[ ON 1 ' R •'T�` THRE POP. R ;PAT ( 1 { PER LOCAL CONS �• 0 • I I rr 0 T • 1 COT a x2• 1 7 —C. 5 .- I I OUTDOOR IMMO Field Wiring TXERP ITYPIOALI I 1 R 0 12 0 Y1 W x2 B T r I I I i I L__ L L___ •0 • L auN TO CC AMAS[ —�`-• W, N • POR MILL S ROOTL LO3C�L 000[3 i fv Y2 FTLL�14 Y1 1 Na I21C756958P02I •— 10 a1NOLE 011 )CT . ^ � 000a SUPPLY J RR L OCAI CODE !xOI! 1 •T' 'on 3 w2 BT 3 RCM: • 0 1 RELOV[ JI•P[N B[TIIIM •I ND R2 IF 001 N W S IS USED. N S. CIRCUIT TIC ESC NE p[ RE 1101DYEO TIQ a •, TEIYINAL NO REC000 TED TO TIC V MANNA/ CO THE INDOOR SECTION LM SOLES! TEMAINAL ROAM AS SHP.. J. POINT AO [R fM OR pDLLS[PO IS SINAI IM VSED ENTRY PILLS OPTIONAL. SINGLE POINT IER ENTRY OPTIN M PO M •, T IS THROWN ELECTRIC (EATER ONLY. HE 0.00.0E LAS SCUMS TEIOINAALL [ORIO.TRAHVOIOEI. MID A RELAY AM PACTCWE INETALRL[O INppWL[Rp10Y[C[OR � '• 82 M C p A A INL AI�wNn�TS Y �SORY KITS MYTf I 00JS300I 1.-.--__--1 Mu RAYTFYROOM IN ACCESSORY 100 APPLICATION RITM THE • T A m1E In ITS TNEY Aa APR Ito rIM OR y SHIM 0 PH St IRT M IEN • OA O B =x ' u TE • R OSTAT ACC[S Figure 28. TW_030A /TWE060B; TW /TWE090B; TW_060 /TWE120B; TW_050 /TWE100B 26 TWE- SVX03C -EN • • TTA, UN, TTP, TTR, TTB, TTX, TTY and TTZ (parts only) This warranty is extended by American Standard to the original purchaser and to any succeeding owner of the real property to which the Air Conditioner is originally affixed, and applies to products purchased and retained for use within the U.S.A. and Canada. There is no warranty against corrosion, erosion or deterioration. If any part of your Air Conditioner fails because of a manufacturing defect within one year from the date of original purchase, Warrantor will furnish without charge the required replacement part. In addition, if the sealed motor - compressor(s) fail(s) because of a manufacturing defect within the second through fifth year from the date of original purchase, Warrantor will furnish without charge a replacement compressor(s). Warrantor's obligations and liabilities under this warranty are limited to furnishing F.O.B. Warrantor factory or warehouse replacement parts for Warrantor's products covered under this warranty. Warrantor shall not be obligated to pay for the cost of lost refrigerant. No liability shall attach to Warrantor until products have been paid for and then liability shall be limited solely to the purchase price of the equipment under warranty shown to be defective. THE WARRANTY AND LIABILITY SET FORTH HEREIN ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND LIABILITIES, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR IN NEGLIGENCE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN LAW OR IN FACT, INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR USE, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL WARRANTOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. TWE- SVX03C -EN Warranty Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. American Standard Inc. 2701 Wilma Rudolph Blvd. Clarksville, TN 37040 -1008 Attention: Manager, Product Service TW- 338 -0597 * This warranty is for commercial usage of said equipment and not applicable when the equipment is used for a residential application. Commercial use is any application where the end purchaser uses the product for other than personal, family or household purposes. Commercial Equipment Rated 20 Tons and Larger and Related Accessories (Parts Only) PRODUCTS COVERED — This warranty is extended by American Standard Inc., and applies only to commercial equipment rated 20 tons and larger and related accessories purchased and retained for use within the U.S.A. and Canada. Warrantor warrants fora period of 12 months from initial start-up or 18 months from date of shipment, whichever is less, that the products covered by this warranty (1) are free from defects in material and manufacture, and (2) have the capacities and ratings set forth in catalogs and bulletins; provided, that no warranty is made against corrosion, erosion or deterioration. Warrantor's obligations and liabilities under this warranty are limited to furnishing, F.O.B. factory replacement parts (or equipment at the option of Warrantor) for all Warrantor's products not conforming to this warranty. Warrantor shall not be obligated to pay for the cost of lost refrigerant. No liability whatever shall attach to Warrantor until said products have been paid for and then said liability shall be limited to the purchase price of the equipment shown to be defective. The Warranty and Liability set forth herein are in lieu of all other warranties and liabilities, whether in contract or in negligence, express or implied, in law or in fact, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for particular use, and in no event shall warrantor be liable for any incidental or consequential damages. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. American Standard Inc. — Warrantor 2701 Wilma Rudolph Blvd. Clarksville, TN 37040 GW-598-4799 27 Literature Order Number TWE- SVX03C -EN Date March 2007 Supersedes TWE- SVX03C -EN (October 2006) The manufacturer has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserves the right to change design and specifications without notice. • • • Installation Operation, ,. Maintenance • Customer Property — Contains wiring, ser- vice, and operation information. Please retain. Models: WSCO36A - WSC120A WSCO36E - WSC060E .ire r.....z�R. r FE1 Copy Product Section Product Model Literature Type Sequence • Date File No. Supersedes IMPORTANT NOTE: All phases of this installation must comply with the NATIONAL, STATE & LOCAL CODES. In addition to local codes, the installation must conform with National Electric Code -ANSI/NFPA NO. 70 LATEST REVISION and NFPA 90 STANDARD LATEST REVISION for the installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilati� Systems. KK CITY OF TUKWILA Since the manufacturer has a policy of continuous product improve- ment, it reserves the right to change specifications and design without notice. The installation and servicing of the equipment referred to in this booklet should be done by qualified, experienced technicians. © American Standard Inc. 2007 All rights reserved RT SVX23C -EN Library Service Literature Unitary Rooftop AC — Lt. Comm. SZ W Installation/ Oper/ Maint 1C August 2007 SV- UN- RT- SVX23C -EN RT- SVX23B -EN 4 /06 Packaged Heat Pump 3 Through 10 8coI1P,JANF a OCT 0 2008 City Of Tukwila B ILDING DIVISION SEP 2 3 2008 PERMIT CENTER MOS 2-;1 General Information Literature Change History 3 Overview of Manual 3 Model Number Description 3 Model Number Description 3 Supply Fan Failure Input (Optional) 5 Clogged Filter Switch (Optional) 5 General Information 6 Compressor Disable (CPR1 /2) 6 High Pressure Control (Optional) 6 Power Exhaust Control (Optional) 6 Lead /Lag Control (Dual Circuit Only) 6 Zone Sensor Module (ZSM) (BAYSENS007B) 6 Zone Sensor Module (ZSM) (BAYSENS009B) 6 Zone Sensor (BAYSENS011B) 6 Programmable Zone Sensor - BAYSENS019B 6 Remote Zone Sensor (BAYSENS013C) 7 Remote Zone Sensor (BAIj'SENSb14C) 7 Remote Zorie Sensor (BAYSENS916A) 7 Remote Zone Sensor (BAYSENS017B) 7 High Temperature Sensor (BAYFRST001A) 7 Evaporator Frost Control 7 Smoke Detector Sensor (Optional) 7 Phase Monitor (Optional) 1 7 Pre - Installation checklist Precautionary Measures 8 Unit Clearances Installation . .... ................. 9 Unit Dimensions Installation 10,11 Installation Rigging and Center -of- Gravity Data 12 Horizontal Units Supply & Return Air Openings 13 Downflow Unit Supply & Return Air Openings 13 Roofcurb Installation 14 Rigging 14 Factory Installed Economizer 16 Horizontal Discharge Conversion 16 TCO -A Instructions: 17 Return Air Smoke Detector 18 Installation 19 Electric Heat Requirements 19 Condensate Drain Configuration 19 Filter Installation 20 Main Unit Power 20 Optional TBUE Wiring 20 Field Installed Control Wiring 21 Control Power Transformer 21 Controls using 24 VAC 21 24V -AC • Conductors 21 Controls -using DC Analog Input/Outputs 21 (Standard Low Voltage Multiconductor Wire) 21 • DC Conductors 21 Conventional Thermostat Field Wiring 22 Reliatel Control 23 Customer Low Voltage Routing- 23 Smoke Detector - (ReliaTelT"^ only) 24 Customer Lo oltage Wiring- 24 Table of Contents 2 Pre -start Space Temperature Averaging 26 Voltage Imbalance 27 Electrical Phasing . 27 Compressor Crankcase Heaters (Optional) 28 Service Test Guide for Component Operation 30 Start-Up ReliaTel Control 31 Compressor Start-Up 32 Scroll Compressors 32 Heating Start-Up 32 Final System Setup 33 Maintenance Fan Belt Adjustment - Belt Drive Units 34 Belt Tension Gauge 34 Filters 35 Return Air Smoke Detector Maintenance 35 Cooling Season 35 Heating Season 35 Sample Maintenance Log 38 Trouble Shooting System Status Checkout Procedure ...... ... ... 39 System failure 39 Cooling Failure 39 Service Failure 39 Simultaneous Heat and Cool Failure 39 Cool Failure 39 Resetting Cooling and Heating Lockouts 40 (ZTS) Service Indicator 40 Fan Failure Switch 40 Zone Temperature Sensor (ZTS) Test 40 Zone Temperature Thermistor (ZTEMP) 40 Cooling Set Point (CSP) and Heating Set Point (HSP) 40 Trouble Shooting 41 Testing serial communication voltage 41 ReliaTel Refrigeration Module (RTRM) Default Chart 41 Unit Economizer Control (ECA) Troubleshooting 41 ReliaTel Control 41 • • • • Overview of Manual Note: One copy of this document ships inside the control panel of each unit and is customer property. It must be retained by the unit's maintenance personnel. This booklet describes proper installation, operation, and maintenance procedures for air cooled systems. By care- fully reviewing the information within this manual and fol- lowing the instructions, the risk of improper operation and /or component damage will be minimized. It is important that periodic maintenance be performed to help assure trouble free operation. A maintenance sched- ule is provided at the end of this manual. Should equip- ment failure occur, contact a qualified service organiza- tion with qualified, experienced HVAC technicians to properly diagnose and repair this equipment. Model Number Description All products are identified by a multiple- character model number that precisely identifies a particular type of unit. An explanation of the alphanumeric identification code is provided below. Its use will enable the owner /operator, in- stalling contractors, and service engineers to define the operation, specific components, and other options for any specific unit. When ordering replacement parts or requesting service, be sure to refer to the specific model number and serial number printed on the unit nameplate. NOTICE: Warnings and Cautions appear at appropriate sections throughout this manual. Read these carefully. AL WARNING- Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION - Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices. CAUTION - Indicates a situation that may result in equipment or property- damage -only accidents. WARNING Contains Refrigerant! System contains of and refrigerant under high pres- sure. Recover refrigerant to relieve pressure before opening the system. See unit nameplate for refrigerant type. Do not use non - approved refrigerants, refrigerant substitutes, or refrigerant additives. Failure to follow proper procedures or the use of non - approved refrigerants, refrigerant substitutes, or re- frigerant additives could result in death or serious in- jury or equipment damage. General Information WARNING Hazardous Voltage w /Capacitors! Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon- nects and discharge all motor start/run capacitors be- fore servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be inadvertently energized. Verify with an appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors have discharged. Failure to disconnect power and dis- charge capacitors before servicing could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION Equipment Damage From Ultraviolet (UV) Lights! The manufacturer does not recommend field installation of ultraviolet lights in its equipment for the intended purpose of improving indoor air quality. High intensity C- band ultraviolet light is known to severely damage polymer (plastic) materials and poses a personal safety risk to anyone exposed to the light without proper personal protective equipment. Polymer materials commonly found in HVAC equipment that may be susceptible include insulation on electrical wiring, fan belts, thermal insulation, various fasteners and bush- ings. Degradation of these materials can result in serious damage to the equipment. The manufacturer accepts no responsibility for the performance or operation of our equipment in which ultraviolet devices were installed outside of the manufacturer's factory or its approved suppliers. CAUTION Roof Damage! System contains oil and refrigerant under high pressure. Roofs should be protected from exposure to oils and refrigerant in the system. If rooftop is not protected damage to the roof may occur. Note: For additional information regarding the safe discharge of capacitors, see PROD- SVB06A -EN or PROD- SVB06A -FR DIGIT 1 - Unit Function W = Packaged Heat Pump DIGIT 2 - Efficiency S = Standard Efficiency DIGIT 3 - Airflow C = Convertible DIGITS 4,5,6 - Nominal Gross Cooling Capacity (MBh) 036 = 048 = 060 = 072 = 090 = 120 = 3 Ton 4Ton 5 Ton 6 Ton T/2 Ton 10 Ton DIGIT 7 - Major Design Sequence A = First E = R410A DIGIT 8 - Unit Voltage 1 = 208 - 230/60/1 3 = 208 - 230/60/3 4 = 460/60/3 W= 575/60/3 DIGIT 9 - Unit Controls R = ReliaTeITM Microprocessor DIGIT 10 - Electric Heater 0 = No Electric Heater A = 5 kw (1 phase) B = 6 kw (3 phase) D = 10 kw (1 phase) E = 12 kw (3 phase) F = 14 kw (1 phase) G = 18 kw (1 and 3 phase) J = 23 kw (3 phase) K = 27 kw (3 phase) N = 36 kw (3 phase) P = 54 kw (3 phase) DIGIT 11 - Minor Design Sequence A = First Sequence DIGITS 1213 - Service Sequence Factory Assigned General Information W S C 036A 3 R B A ** C 0 0 0 A 1 0 0 0 1 Al I) 1 2 3 4,5,6 7 8 9 10 11 12,1314 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 DIGIT 14 - Fresh Air Selection 0 = No Fresh Air A = Manual Outside Air Damper 0-50% 13 = Motorized Outside Air Damper 0-50% C = Economizer, Dry Bulb 0 -100% without Barometric Relief D = Economizer, Dry Bulb 0-100% with Barometric Relief E = Economizer, Reference Enthalpy 0-100% without Barometric Relief F = Economizer, Reference Enthalpy 0-100% with Barometric Relief G = Economizer, Comparative Enthalpy 0- 100% without Barometric Relief H = Economizer, Comparative Enthalpy 0 -100% with Barometric Relief DIGIT 15 - Supply Fan /Drive Type /Motor 0 = Standard Drive 1 = Oversized Motor 2 = Optional Belt Drive Motor DIGIT 16 - Hinged Service Access /Filters 0 = Standard Panels/Standard Filters A = Hinged Access Panels/Standard Filters B = Standard Panels/2" Pleated Filters C = Hinged Access Panels/2" Pleated Filters DIGIT 17 - Condenser Coil Protection 0 = Standard Coil 1 = Standard Coil with Hail Guard 2 = Epoxy Coated Condenser Coil 3 = Epoxy Coated Condenser Coil with Hail Guard 4 = *CompleteCoat Condenser Coil 5 = *CompleteCoat Condenser Coil and Hail Guard DIGIT 18 - Through the Base Provisions 0 = No Through the Base Provisions A = Through the Base Electric DIGIT 19 - Disconnect/Circuit Breaker (3 phase only) 0 = Without Disconnect Switch /Circuit Breaker/Phase Monitor 1 = Unit Mounted Non -Fused Disconnect Switch 2 = Unit Mounted Circuit Breaker 3 = Unit Mounted Phase Monitor 4 = Unit Mounted Phase Monitor and Unit Mounted Non -Fused Disconnect Switch 5 = Unit Mounted Phase Monitor and Unit Mounted Circuit Breaker * — Only available on R410A (Digit 7 = E) models 4 DIGIT 20 - Convenience Outlet 0 = No Convenience Outlet A = Unpowered Convenience Outlet B = Powered Convenience Outlet (3 phase only) DIGIT 21 - Communications Options 0 = No Communications Interface 1 = Trane Communications Interface 2 = LonTalk® Communications Interface DIGIT 22 - Refrigeration System Option 0 = Standard Refrigeration System DIGIT 23 - Refrigeration Controls 0 = No Refrigeration Control 1 = High Pressure Control 2 = Frostat 3 = Crankcase Heater 4 = High Pressure Control and Frostat 5 = High Pressure Control and Crankcase Heater 6 = Frostat and Crankcase Heater 7 = High Pressure Control, Frostat and Crankcase Heater DIGIT 24 - Smoke Detector 0 = No Smoke Detector A = Return Air Smoke Detector B = Supply Air Smoke Detector C = Supply and Return Air Smoke Detectors DIGIT 25 - Monitoring Controls 0 = No Monitoring Control 1 = Clogged Filter Switch 2 = Fan Failure Switch 3 = Discharge Air Sensing Tube 4 = Clogged Filter Switch and Fan Fail Switch 5 = Clogged Filter Switch and Discharge Air Sensing Tube 6 = Fan Fail Switch and Discharge Air Sensing Tube 7 = Clogged Filter and Fan Fail Switches and Discharge Air Sensing Tube • • • Unit Nameplate A Mylar unit nameplate is located on the unit's corner sup- port next to the filter access panel. It includes the unit model number, serial number, electrical characteristics, refrigerant charge, as well as other pertinent unit data. Compressor Nameplate The nameplate for the compressors are located on the side of the compressor. Unit Description Before shipment, each unit is leak tested, dehydrated, charged with refrigerant and compressor oil, and run tested for proper control operation. The condenser coils are aluminum fin, mechanically bonded to copper tubing. Direct - drive, vertical discharge condenser fans are provided with built -in thermal overload protection. The ReliaTelTm Control Module is a microelectronic control system that is referred to as "Refrigeration Module" (RTRM). The acronym RTRM is used extensively throughout this document when referring to the control system network. These modules through Proportional /Integral control algo- rithms perform specific unit functions that governs unit op- eration in response to; zone temperature, supply air tem- perature, and /or humidity conditions depending on the ap- plication. The stages of capacity control for these units is achieved by starting and stopping the compressors. The RTRM is mounted in the control panel and is factory wired to the respective internal components. The RTRM re- ceives and interpret information from other unit modules, sensors, remote panels, and customer binary contacts to satisfy the applicable request for cooling. Economizer Control Actuator (Optional) ReliaTelTM Control The ECA monitors the mixed air temperature, return air tem- perature, minimum position setpoint (local or remote), power exhaust setpoint, CO2 setpoint, CO2, and ambient dry bulb /enthalpy sensor or comparative humidity (return air humidity against ambient humidity) sensors, if selected, to control dampers to an accuracy of +/- 5% of stroke. The ac- tuator is spring returned to the closed position any time that power is lost to the unit. It is capable of delivering up to 25 inch pounds of torque and is powered by 24 VAC. RTC! -- ReliaTelTM Trane Communication Interface (Optional) This module is used when the application calls for an ICSTM building management type control system. It allows the con- trol and monitoring of the system through an ICS panel. The module can be ordered from the factory or ordered as a kit to be field installed. Follow the installation instruction that ships with each kit when field installation is necessary. General Information RLCI - ReliaTelTM LonTalk Communication Interface (Optional) This module is used when the application calls for an ICSTM building management type control system that is LonTalk. It allows the control and monitoring of the system through an ICS panel. The module can be ordered from the factory or ordered as a kit to be field installed. Follow the installation instruction that ships with each kit when field installation is necessary. RTOM — ReliaTelTM Options Module (Optional) The RTOM monitors the supply fan proving, clogged filter, supply air temperature, exhaust fan setpoint, supply air tem- pering, FrostatTM and smoke detector. Refer to system input devices and functions for operation. System Input Devices & Functions The RTRM must have a zone sensor or thermostat input in order to operate the rooftop unit. The flexibility of having several mode capabilities depends upon the type of zone sensor thermostat selected to interface with the RTRM. The descriptions of the following basic Input Devices used within the RTRM network are to acquaint the operator with their function as they interface with the various modules. Refer to the unit's electrical schematic for the specific mod- ule connections. The following controls are available from the factory for field installation. Supply Fan Failure Input (Optional) The Fan Failure Switch can be connected to sense indoor fan operation: FFS (Fan Failure Switch) If air flow through the unit is not proven by the differential pressure switch connected to the RTRM (factory set point 0.07 " w.c.) within 40 seconds nomi- nally, the RTRM will shut off all mechanical operations, lock the system out, send a diagnostic to ICS, and the SERVICE output will flash. The system will remain locked out until a reset is initiated either manually or through ICS. Clogged Filter Switch (Optional) The unit mounted clogged filter switch monitors the pres- sure differential across the return air filters. It is mounted in the filter section and is connected to the RTOM. A diagnostic SERVICE signal is sent to the remote panel if the pressure differential across the filters is at least 0.5" w.c. The contacts will automatically open when the pressure differential across the filters decreases to approximately 0.4" w.c. The clogged filter output is energized when the supply fan is op- erating and the clogged filter switch has been closed for at least 2 minutes. The system will continue to operate regard- less of the status of the filter switch. Compressor Disable (CPR1/2) This input incorporates the low pressure control (LPC) of each refrigeration circuit and can be activated by opening a field supplied contact installed on the LTB. If this circuit is open before the compressor is started, the compressor will not be allowed to operate. Anytime this cir- cuit is opened for 1 continuous second during compressor operation, the compressor for that circuit is immediately turned "Off'. The compressor will not be allowed to restart for a minimum of 3 minutes should the contacts close. If four consecutive open conditions occur during the first three minutes of operation, the compressor for that circuit will be locked out, a diagnostic communicated to the remote panel (if installed), and a manual reset will be required to restart the compressor. Low Pressure Control When the LPC is opened for 1 continuous second, the com- pressor for that circuit is turned off immediately. The com- pressor will not be allowed to restart for a minimum of 3 minutes. If four consecutive open conditions occur during an active call for cooling, the compressor will be locked out, a diganostic communicated to ICST"', if applicable, and a manual reset required to restart tyhe compressor. On dual compressor units only the affected compressor circuit is locked out. High Pressure Control (Optional — Standard on R -410A models) The high pressure controls are wired in series between the compressor outputs on the RTRM and the compressor contactor coils. If the high pressure control switch opens, the RTRM senses a lack of current while calling for cooling and locks the compressor out. If four consecutive open conditions occur during an active call for cooling, the compressor will be locked out, a diganostic communicated to ICST"", if applicable, and a manual reset required to restart tyhe compressor. On dual compressor units only the affected compressor circuit is locked out. Power Exhaust Control (Optional) The power exhaust fan is started whenever the position of the economizer dampers meets or exceed the power ex- haust setpoint when the indoor fan is on. The setpoint panel is located in the return air section and is factory set at 25 %. Lead/Lag Control (Dual Circuit Only) Lead /Lag is a selectable input located on the RTRM. The RTRM is configured from the factory with the Lead /Lag control disabled. To activate the Lead /Lag function, simply cut the wire connected to J3 -8 at the RTRM. When it is activated, each time the designated lead compressor is shut off due to the load being satisfied, the lead compressor or refrigeration circuit switches. When the RTRM is powered up, i.e. after a power failure, the control will default to the number one circuit compressor. General Information 6 Zone Sensor Module (ZSM) (BAYSENS007B) This electronic sensor features three system switch settings ( Heat, Cool, and Off) and two fan settings (On and Auto). It is a manual changeover control with single setpoint. (Cool- ing Setpoint Only) Zone Sensor Module (ZSM) (BAYSENS009B) This electronic sensor features four system switch settings (Heat, Cool, Auto, and Off) and two fan settings (On and Auto). It is a manual or auto changeover control with dual setpoint capability. It can be used with a remote zone tem- perature sensor BAYSENS017B. Zone Sensor (BAYSENS011 B) This electronic sensor features four system switch settings (Heat, Cool, Auto, and Off) and two fan settings (On and Auto) with four system status LED's. It is a manual or auto changeover control with dual setpoint capability. It can be used with a remote zone temperature sensor BAYSENS017B. Programmable Zone Sensor - BAYSENS019B This 7 day programmable sensor features 2, 3 or 4 periods for Occupied or Unoccupied programming per day. If the power is interrupted, the program is retained in permanent memory. If power is off for an extended period of time, only the clock and day may have to be reset. The Zone Sensor allows selection of 2, 3 or 4 system modes (Heat, Cool, Auto, and Off), two fan modes (On and Auto). It has dual temperature selection with programmable start time capability. The occupied cooling set point ranges between 45 and 98 degrees Fahrenheit. The heating set point ranges between 43 and 96 degrees Fahrenheit. A liquid crystal display (LCD) displays zone temperature, temperature set points, day of the week, time, and opera- tional mode symbols. The Option Menu is used to enable or disable applicable functions, i.e.; Morning Warm -up, Economizer minimum po- sition override during unoccupied status, Fahrenheit or Centigrade, Supply air tempering, Remote zone tempera- ture sensor, 12/24 hour time display, Smart fan, and Com- puted recovery. During an occupied period, an auxiliary relay rated for 1.25 amps @ 30 volts AC with one set of single pole double throw contacts is activated. Electronic Timeclock (BAYCLCK001 A). Status Inputs (4 Wires Optional) The ZSM can be wired to receive four (4) operating status signals from the RTRM (HEAT, COOL, SYSTEM "ON ", SER- VICE). Four (4) wires from the RTRM should be connected to the appropriate terminals (7, 8, 9 & 10) on the ZSM. Remote Zone Sensor (BAYSENS013C) This electronic sensor features remote zone sensing and timed override with override cancellation. It is used with a Trane Integrated Comfort building management system. • • • Remote Zone Sensor (BAYSENS014C) This electronic sensor features single setpoint capability and timed override with override cancellation. It is used with a Trane Integrated Comfort TM building management system. Remote Zone Sensor (BAYSENS016A) This bullet type temperature sensor can be used for; outside air (ambient) sensing, return air temperature sensing, supply air temperature sensing, remote temperature sensing (un- covered. Wiring procedures vary according to the particular application and equipment involved. Refer to the unit's wiring diagrams for proper connections. Remote Zone Sensor (BAYSENS017B) This electronic sensor can be used with BAYSENS006B, 008B, 010B, 019B Remote Panels. When this sensor is wired to a BAYSENS019B Remote Panel, wiring must be 18 AWG Shielded Twisted Pair (Belden 8760 or equivalent). Refer to the specific Remote Panel for wiring details. High Temperature Sensor (BAYFRST001A) This sensor connects to the RTRM Emergency Stop Input lo- cated on the LTB and provides high limit "shutdown" of the unit and requires a manual reset. The sensor is used to de- tect high temperatures due to fire in the air conditioning or ventilation ducts. The sensor is designed to mount directly to the sheet metal duct. Each kit contains two sensors. The re- turn air duct sensor (X1310004001) is set to open at 135 °F. The supply air duct sensor (X1310004002) is set to open at 240 °F. The control can be reset after the temperature has been lowered approximately 25 °F below the cutout setpoint. Evaporator Frost Control This input incorporates the FrostatTm control (FOS) located on the indoor coil and can be activated by closing a field sup- plied contact installed in parallel with the FOS. If this circuit is open before the compressor is started, the compressor will not be allowed to operate. Anytime this cir- cuit is opened for 1 continuous second during compressor operation, the compressor for that circuit is immediately turned "Off'. The compressor will not be allowed to restart for a minimum of 3 minutes should the FOS close. Smoke Detector Sensor (Optional) This sensor is only applicable on units equipped with a RTOM. It provides high limit "shutdown" of the unit and re- quires a manual reset. The sensor is used to detect smoke due to fire in the air conditioning or ventilation ducts. Important: The supply and return air smoke detectors are designed to shut off the unit if smoke is sensed in the supply air stream or return air stream. This function is performed by sampling the airflow entering the unit at the return air opening. Follow the instructions provided below to assure that the airflow through the unit is sufficient for adequate sampling. Failure to follow these instructions will prevent the smoke detectors from performing it's design function. General Information 7 Important: Airflow through the unit is affected by the amount of dirt and debris accumulated on the indoor coil and filters. To insure that airflow through the unit is adequate for proper sampling by the return air smoke detector, complete adherence to the maintenance procedures, including recommended intervals between filter changes, and coil cleaning is required. Important: Periodic checks and maintenance procedures must be performed on the smoke detector to insure that it will function properly. For detailed instructions concerning these checks and procedures, refer to the appropriate section(s) of the smoke detector Installation and Maintenance Instructions provided with the literature package for this unit. In order for the supply air smoke detector or return air smoke detector to properly sense smoke in the supply air stream or return air stream, the air velocity entering the smoke detector unit must be between 500 and 4000 feet per minute. Equipment covered in this manual will develop an airflow velocity that falls within these limits over the en- tire airflow range specified in the evaporator fan perfor- mance tables. There are certain models, however, if operated at low air- flow, will not develop an airflow velocity that falls within the required 500 to 4000 feet per minute range. For these models, the design airflow shall be greater than or equal to 1000 feet per minute MINIMUM. Phase Monitor (Optional) ReliaTel Control Only This sensor monitors voltage between the 3 conductors of the 3 phase power supply. Two LED lights are provided. The green light indicates that a balanced 3 phase supply circuit is properly connected. The red light indicates that unit operation has been prevented. There are two condi- tions that will prevent unit operation.The power supply cir- cuit is not balanced with the proper phase sequence of L1,L2,L3 for the 3 conductors of a 3 phase circuit. The line to line voltage is not between 180 volts and 633 volts. Unit Inspection As soon as the unit arrives at the job site [ ] Verify that the nameplate data matches the data on the sales order and bill of lading (including electrical data). [ ] Verify that the power supply complies with the unit nameplate specifications. [ ] Visually inspect the exterior of the unit, including the roof, for signs of shipping damage. AL WARNING Fiberglass Wool ! Product contains fiberglass wool. Disturbing the insula- tion in this product during installation, maintenance or repair will expose you to airborne particles of glass wool fibers and ceramic fibers known to the state of Califor- nia to cause cancer through inhalation. Glass wool fi- bers may also cause respiratory, skin or eye irritation. Precautionary Measures Avoid breathing fiberglass dust. Use a NIOSH approved dust/mist respirator. Avoid contact with the skin or eyes. Wear long - sleeved, loose- fitting clothing, gloves, and eye protec- tion. Wash clothes separately from other clothing: rinse washer thoroughly. Operations such as sawing, blowing, tear -out, and spraying may generate fiber concentrations requiring additional respiratory protection. Use the appropriate NIOSH approved respiration in these situations. First Aid Measures Eye Contact - Flush eyes with water to remove dust. If symptoms persist, seek medical attention. Skin Contact - Wash affected areas gently with soap and warm water after handling. If the job site inspection of the unit reveals damage or mate- rial shortages, file a claim with the carrier immediately. Specify the type and extent of the damage on the "bill of lad- ing" before signing. [ ] Visually inspect the internal components for shipping damage as soon as possible after delivery and before it is stored. Do flQl walk on the sheet metal base pans. [ ] If concealed damage is discovered, notify the carrier's ter- minal of damage immediately by phone and by mail. Concealed damage must be reported within 15 days. Request an immediate joint inspection of the damage by the carrier and the consignee. Do not remove damaged material from the receiving location. Take photos of the damage, if possible. The owner must provide reasonable evidence that the damage did not occur after delivery. [ ] Notify the appropriate sales representative before install- ing or repairing a damaged unit. Pre - Installation Checklist 8 Storage Take precautions to prevent condensate from forming inside the unit's electrical compartments and motors if: a. the unit is stored before it is installed; or, b. the unit is set on the roof curb, and temporary heat is pro- vided in the building. Isolate all side panel service en- trances and base pan openings (e.g., conduit holes, S/A and R/A openings, and flue openings) from the ambient air until the unit is ready for start-up. Note: Do not use the unit's heater for temporary heat without first completing the start-up procedure detailed under "Starting the Unit ". The manufacturer will not assume any responsibility for equipment damage resulting from condensate accumula- tion on the unit's electrical and /or mechanical components. Unit Clearances Figure 1 illustrates the minimum operating and service clearances for either a single or multiple unit installation. These clearances are the minimum distances necessary to assure adequate serviceability, cataloged unit capacity, and peak operating efficiency. Providing less than the recommended clearances may re- sult in condenser coil starvation, "short- circuiting" of exhaust and economizer airflows, or recirculation of hot condenser air. • Figure 1 • Typical Installation Clearances for Single & Multiple Unit Applications SIDE BY SIDE NOTE 2 NOTES: 1. FOR HORIZONTAL DISCHARGE UNIT, THIS MEASUREMENT IS REDUCED TO 1' 6' (457 MM) TO MINIMIZE DUCT EXTENSIONS. 2. WHEN EQUIPPED WITH ECONOMIZER OR BAROMETRIC RELIEF DAMPER, CLEARANCE DISTANCE IS TO BE MEASURED FROM PROTUDING HOOD INSTEAD OF BASE. 3. CLEARANCE IS THE SAME IF ANY UNIT IS ROTATED 180' 4. ADDITION CLEARANCE REQUIRED WHEN BAROMETRIC DAMPER OR ECONOMIZER IS INSTALLED. NOTE 4 WSCO36A - WSC060A WSCO36E, WSC048E Unit Clearances 1829 MM 2134 MM 9 END TO END NOTE 2,3 WSC072A - WSC120A WSC060E Figure 2 Unit Dimensional Data WSCO36A, WSC048A, WSC060A EVAPORATOR SECTION ACCESS PANEL ALTERNATE CONDENSATE DRAM 9/4 -14NPT DI& HOLE Figure 2 continued Unit Dimensional Data WSCO36E, WSC048E EVAPORATOR SECTION ACCESS PANEL ALTERNATE CONDENSATE DRAIN CONNECTION 3/4 -14 NPT DIA. HOLE 1 23 1/MM 6978' 4214' 1749/ MM 1075 MM 2' ELECTRICAL CONNECTION (SINGLE POINT POWER WHEN HEAT INSTALLED) 41/4' 108MM Unit LDimensions 28 9/18' 598 MM 421/4' 1749 MM 1078 MM 2' ELECTRICAL CONNECTION (SINGLE POINT POWER WHEN HEAT INSTALLED) CONTROL AND COMPRESSOR ACCESS PANEL CONTROL AND COMPRESSOR ACCESS PANEL 10 5 5/8' 143 MM 9 5/8' 244 MM S sir 143MM 244 MM TOP PANEL 41/4 108MM' 9 1 1 M 14 MM 7 5/8' 194 MM 44 1/4' 1124 MM TOP PANEL 441/4' 1124 MM CONDENSER FAN 32 1/4' 819 MM CONDENSER COIL UNIT CONTROL WIRE 7/8' (222MM) DIA. HOLE SERVICE GAUGE PORT ACCESS 1 GS' (35MM) DU. HOLE UNIT POWER WIRE 2' (51MM) DIA. HOLE CONDENSER FAN 981/4' 921 MM CONDEN/ UN CONTROL WIRE 7/8' (22MM) DUL HOL SERVICE GAUGE POI 13 (35501) DIA UNIT POWER WIRE 1 Nu* (2EM11) DIA HOLE • • • Figure 2 - Continued • Unit Dimensional Data WSC072A, WSC090A WSC060E EVAPORATOR SECTION ACCESS PANEL ALTERNATE CONDENSATE DRAIN CONNECTION 94.14 NPT DIA. HOLE Figure 2 - Continued Unit Dimensional Data WSC120A EVAPORATOR SECTION ACCESS PANEL ALTERNATE CONDENSATE DRAIN CONNECTION 2/4 -14 NPT DIA. HOLE 41/ 108 41/4 108 MM r ELECTRICAL CONNECTION (SINGLE POINT POWER WHEN HEAT INSTALLED) 47 7/8' 88 618• 1218 2251 MM r ELECTRICAL CONNECTION (BINDLE POINT POWER WHEN HEAT ) 477 88 Dr 1218 2251 MM Unit Dimensions (**15:7-:.:#1)))))))* CONTROL AND COMPRESSOR ACCESS PANEL CONTROL AND COMPRESSOR ACCESS PANEL 1 TOP PANEL TOP PANEL 41/4 08MM 8818 48 MM 75/8 194 MM 681/' 959 MM CONDENSER FAN 41/1 08 MM 65/8 49 7a1S 194 MM �MM CONDENSER FAN 407/ 1038 MM CONDENSER COIL UNIT CONTROL WIRE 7/8' (7.loLh DIA. HOLE SERVICE GAUGE PORT ACCESS 1 S18' (MAI) DIA. HOLE UNIT POWER WIRE 1 &8' (96101) DUL HOLE 1190 CONDENSER COIL UNIT CONTROL WIRE 7/8' (PZMM) D1A HOLE SERVICE GAUGE PORT ACCESS 1 &S' (86MIA) DIA HOLE UNIT POWER WIRE 1 WV (85MA) DIA. HOLE Table 1 Typical Unit Weights & Point Loading Data Unit Model WSCO36A(1,3,4,W)* WSCO36E(1,3,4,W)* WSC048A1* WSC048A(3,4,W)* WSC048E11,3,4,W)* WSC060A(1,3,4,W)* WSC060E(1,3,4,W)* WSC060(A,B)(D,T)* WSC072A(3,4,W)* WSC072(A,B)(D,T)* WSC090A(3,4,W)* WSC090(A,B)(D,T)* WSC120A(3,4,W)* WSC120AT* Accessory Economizer Powered Exhaust Motorized Outside Air Damper Manual Outside Air Damper Roof Curb Oversized Motor Belt Drive Motor Smoke Detector, Supply Coil Guards Hinged Doors Powered Convenience Outlet Through the Base Electrical Electric Heaters Net Weight (Ibs) A 442 138 514 177 474 474 525 492 682 532 724 812 794 834 941 981 151 151 181 160 228 170 243 269 272 282 320 330 Table 1 Continued Typical Unit Weights & Point Loading Data Barometric Relief 7 20 16 70 5 38 Smoke Detector, Return 7 5 12 10 38 8 15 Unit Mounted Circuit Breaker 5 Unit Mounted Disconnect 5 110 107 114 114 109 118 177 128 184 206 200 210 243 253 Installation Corner Wt. (Ibs) B C 88 113 95 95 115 97 114 107 128 146 137 147 162 172 Net Weight 3 -STons 6- 10Tons 26 36 10 80 30 26 115 8 7 5 20 12 38 13 30 5 5 Notes: 1. Weights for options not listed are < 5 lbs. 2 Net weight should be added to unit weight when ordering factory- installed accessories. Center of Gravity (In.) D Length Width 105 31 19 117 29 20 114 31 19 114 31 19 119 29 20 117 31 19 163 38 24 127 31 19 170 38 22 191 38 22 185 38 22 195 38 22 215 38 21 225 38 21 12 WARNING Heavy Objects! Do not use cables (chains or slings) except as shown. Each of the cables (chains or slings) used to lift the unit must be capable of supporting the entire weight of the unit. Lifting cables (chains or slings) may not be of the same length. Adjust as necessary for even unit lift. Other lifting arrangements may cause equipment or property - only damage. Failure to properly lift unit may result in death or serious injury. See details below. WARNING Improper Unit Lift! Test lift unit approximately 24 inches to verify proper center of gravity lift point.To avoid dropping of unit, repo- sition lifting point if unit is not level. Failure to properly lift unit could result in death or serious injury or possible equipment or property-only damage. Figure 3 Rigging and Center -of- Gravity Data ATTACH CHAIN OR CABLE T CLEVIS CENTER Or GRAVITY LENGTH LENGTH CLEVIS CENTER 0r GTY /WIDTH Foundation Horizontal Units If the unit is installed at ground level, elevate it above the snow line. Provide concrete footings at each support loca- tion with a "full perimeter" support structure or a slab foun- dation for support. Refer to Table 1 for the unit's operating and point loading weights when constructing a footing foun- dation. If anchoring is required, anchor the unit to the slab using hold down bolts or isolators. Isolators should be installed to minimize the transmission of vibrations into the building. For rooftop applications, ensure the roof is strong enough to support the combined unit and support structural weight. Refer to Table 1 for the unit operating weights. If anchoring is required, anchor the unit to the roof with hold -down bolts or isolators. Check with a roofing contractor for proper waterproofing. Figure 4A WSCO36A- WSC060A WSCO36E, WSC048E Horizontal Unit Supply & Return Air Openings �(i((:�iliiic. ••: _la`s- •;iiiii %I % %�� e 3(414 NPT DRAIN CONNECTION Figure 4B WSC072A- WSC120A WSC060E Horizontal Unit Supply & Return Air Openings 3/4-14 NPT DIA. HOLE CONDENSATE DRAIN Installation 3114• 23 w• 881MM 3 9ne• 81MM 484• 1 1104 13 Ductwork Figure 4 illustrates the supply and return air openings as viewed form the rear of the unit. Elbows with turning vanes or splitters are recommended to minimize air noise due to turbulence and to reduce static pressure. When attaching the ductwork to the unit, provide a water- tight flexible connector at the unit to prevent operating sounds from transmitting through the ductwork. All outdoor ductwork between the unit and the structure should be weather proofed after installation is completed. WSCO36A- WSC060A WSCO36E, WSC048E Downflow Unit Supply & Return Air Openings 02L 10 i0/ ioer 4 me � S 1E11 OpmQIBRE SUPPLY WSC072A- WSC120A WSC060E Downflow Unit Supply & Return Air Openings .'.:.Z - -zvw RERUN ale w } r- SUPPLY TOLOUGH THE BASE o>z rime. 100 04 MM /• - / 1.5 I Roof Curb Note: To assure proper condensate flow during operation, the unit (and curb) must be level. Installation Downflow The roof curbs for these units consists of a "full perimeter" enclosure to support the unit. Before installing any roof curb, verify; 1. That it is the correct curb for the unit, 2. That it includes the necessary gaskets and hardware, 3. That the purposed installation location provides the re- quired clearance for proper operation. 4. Insure that the curb is level and square. The top surface of the curb must be true to assure an adequate curb -to -unit seal. WARNING Combustible Materials! Maintain proper clearance between the unit heat ex- changer, vent surfaces and combustible materials. Refer to unit nameplate and installation instructions for proper clearances. Improper clearances could result in a fire hazard. Failure to maintain proper clearances could re- sult in death or serious injury or property damage. 5. Verify that appropriate materials were used in the con- struction of roof and ductwork. Combustible materials should not be used in the construction of ductwork or roof curb that is in close proximity to heater elements or any hot surface. Any combustible material on the inside of the unit base should be removed and replaced with appropriate material. Step -by -step curb assembly and installation instructions ship with each accessory roof curb kit. Follow the instruc- tions carefully to assure proper fit -up when the unit is set into place. If the unit is elevated, a field constructed catwalk around the unit is strongly recommended to provide easy access for unit maintenance and service. Recommendations for installing the Supply Air and Return Air ductwork joining the roof curb are included in the curb instruction booklet. Curb ductwork must be fabricated and installed by the installing contractor before the unit is set into place. Note: For sound consideration, cut only the holes in the roof deck for the ductwork penetrations. Do not cut out the entire roof deck within the curb perimeter. 14 If a Curb Accessory Kit is not used: a. The ductwork can be attached directly to the factory- provided flanges around the unit's supply and return air openings. Be sure to use flexible duct connections at the unit. b. For "built -up" curbs supplied by others, gaskets must be installed around the curb perimeter flange and the supply and return air opening flanges. Rigging A Rigging illustration and Center -of- Gravity dimensional data table is shown in Figure 3. Refer to the typical unit op- erating weights table before proceeding. 1. Remove all drill screws fastening wood protection to metal baserail. Remove all screws securing wooden pro- tection to wooden top crate. 2. Remove Wooden Top Crate. WARNING Heavy Objects! Do not use cables (chains or slings) except as shown. Each of the cables (chains or slings) used to lift the unit must be capable of supporting the entire weight of the unit. Lifting cables (chains or slings) may not be of the same length. Adjust as necessary for even unit lift. Other lifting arrangements may cause equipment or property- only damage. Failure to properly lift unit may result in death or serious injury. &WARNING Improper Unit Lift! Test lift unit approximately 24 inches to verify proper center of gravity lift point.To avoid dropping of unit, repo- sition lifting point if unit is not level. Failure to properly lift unit could result in death or serious injury or possible equipment or property-only damage. 3. Rig the unit as shown in Figure 3. Attach adequate strength lifting slings to all four lifting brackets in the unit base rail. Do not use cables, chains, or slings except as shown. 4. Install a lifting bar, as shown in Figure 3, to protect the unit and to facilitate a uniform lift. The minimum distance between the lifting hook and the top of the unit should be 7 feet. 5. Test -lift the unit to ensure it is properly rigged and bal- anced, make any necessary rigging adjustments. • REMOVE 2 FORK LIFT BRACKETS Installation 6. Lift the unit enough to allow the removal of two Fork Lift brackets and hardware. Remove the two Fork Lift brack- ets, two metal runners and three wooden boards as shown in the following Figure. � 11It�1�l� II n REMOVE 2 METAL RUNNERS AND 3 WOODEN BOARDS 7. Downflow units; align the base rail of the unit with the curb rail while lowering the unit onto the curb. Make sure that the gasket on the curb is not damaged while posi- tioning the unit. General Unit Requirements The checklist listed below is a summary of the steps re- quired to successfully install a commercial unit. This check- list is intended to acquaint the installing personnel with what is required in the installation process. It does not re- place the detailed instructions called out in the applicable sections of this manual. [ ] Check the unit for shipping damage and material short- age; file a freight claim and notify appropriate sales rep- resentative. [ ] Verify correct model, options and voltage from unit name- plate. [ ] Verify that the installation location of the unit will provide the required clearance for proper operation. [I Assemble and install the roof curb (if applicable). Refer to the latest edition of the curb installers guide that ships with each curb kit. [ ] Fabricate and install ductwork; secure ductwork to curb. [ ] Rigging the unit. [ ] Set the unit onto the curb; check for levelness. [ ] Ensure unit -to -curb seal is tight and without buckles or cracks. [ ] Install and connect a condensate drain line to the evapo- rator drain connection. 15 Factory Installed Economizer [ ] Ensure the economizer has been pulled out into the oper- ating position. Refer to the economizer installers guide for proper position and setup. [ ] Install all access panels. Installation Temperature Limit Switch Usage for Electric Heat Units Units are factory shipped in the downflow discharge confriguration but can be field converted to a horizontal dis- charge confriguration. Some, but not all units require a dif- ferent TCO -A limit switch, which is wire tied near the termi- nal block in the heater compartment if horizontal discharge confriguration is used. Horizontal Discharge Conversion WSCO36A- WSC060A WSCO36E, WSC048E Supplies Needed by Installer for Conversion: 3 oz. tube of High Temperature RTV sealant. (500 °F / 260 °C: Similar to Dow Corning 736) Note: Failure to use recommended sealant could result in unit performance loss. If a unit is to be converted to a Horizontal discharge, the fol- lowing conversion must be performed: 1. Remove RETURN and SUPPLY duct covers. 2. Locate supply cover. Apply % in. (6mm.) continuous bead of 500 °F RTV sealant to the flange as shown. 3. Position SUPPLY DUCT COVER as shown, rotate 90 de- grees to allow entrance into supply opening. Note: If unit is equipped with Discharge Air Sensing option refer to the following figure for proper tube positioning based on unit tonnage. 16 Supply duct cover with RN installed SECURE WITH ONE SCREW 060 HORIZONTAL UNITS SECURE WITH ONE SCREW 060 DOWNrLOW UNITS 4. Slide SUPPLY DUCT COVER into duct openings until in- ward edge of duct cover engages with the 2 retaining clips on the duct flanges. Secure the outward edge of each duct cover with 2 screws. 5. Slide RETURN DUCT COVER (insulation side up) into supply opening until inward edge of duct cover engages with the 2 retaining clips on the duct flange. Secure out- ward edge of the duct cover with two screws. Note: Certain unit/electric heater combinations require a limit switch change out for horizontal airflow applications. Refer to the following instructions to determine if this process is required for the unit undergoing installation. 5. After completing installation of the duct covers for hori- zontal discharge, proceed to TCO -1 instructions. Horizontal Discharge Conversion WSC072A - WSC120A WSC060E Supplies Needed by Installer for Conversion: 3 oz. tube of high Temperature RTV sealant. ( 500 °F / 260 °C : Similar to Dow Corning 736 ) Note: Failure to use recommended sealant could result in unit performance loss. If a unit is to be converted to a Horizontal discharge, the fol- lowing conversion must be performed: 1. Remove RETURN and SUPPLY duct covers. 2. Place SUPPLY DUCT COVER over downflow return opening. (insulation side down) 3. Using self - drilling screws, (or screws removed from duct cover), screw through dimples to attach Duct Cover to base. Supply Duct Cover T p Screw into 4 dimples on top edge 4. On original RETURN DUCT COVER, apply 1 /4" (6mm.) continuous bead of 500 °F RN sealant around flange (op- posite insulation side), as shown. 5. Slide RETURN DUCT COVER (insulation side up) into supply opening until inward edge of duct cover engages with the 2 retaining clips on the duct flange. Secure outward edge of the duct cover with two screws. Insulation side up Return duct cover Supply duct cover Installation Insulation side down Note: If Unit is equipped with Return Air Smoke Detector, refer to field conversion instructions for horizontal discharge before installing return air duct 17 Note: Certain unit/electric heater combinations require a limit switch change out for horizontal airflow applications. Refer to the following instructions to determine if this process is required for the unit undergoing installation. 6. After completing installation of the duct covers for hori- zontal discharge, proceed to TCO -A instructions. TCO -A Instructions: If the unit being installed is listed in the following table and is equipped with the corresponding model number of fac- tory installed electric heater package in the table, the limit control TCO -A must be replaced with the extra limit control shipped in the heater compartment. Replace TCO -A fol- lowing the instructions in steps lthrough 3 below. If the unit being installed does not have a factory installed elec- tric heater package or is equipped with a factory installed electric heater model that does not correspond to any in this table, skip stepsl through 3 and go on to next step in the installation process. Unit Model Number WSC072A4, 090A4 WSC072AW, 090AW WSC 120A4 WSC120AW Electric Heater Model Number BAYHTRS427A, 436A BAYHTRSW27, W36 BAYHTRT454A BAYHTRTW54A 1. Remove the heater section access panel and open the electric heater dead front panel. 2. TCO -A is the limit control located in the central part of the heater mounting plate and that is located on the bot- tom of the two heater element assemblies. To replace this device, first remove the two wires connected to the terminals. Next, remove the two screws which secure it to the heater element mounting plate. Once TCO -A has been removed form the heater element mounting plate, discard this device. 3. Obtain the replacement TCO -A which is secured by a wire tie near the electric heater terminal block in the heater compartment . Attach it to the heater element mounting plate with the two screws that were removed in step 8 above. Connect the two wires that were un- hooked in step 8 to the terminals on the new TCO -A. Refer to the heater package wiring diagram to assure that the wiring is connected properly. 4. Close the electric heater dead front panel and replace heat section access panel. Return Air Smoke Detector The factory installed Return Air Smoke Detector is installed in the Downflow discharge position. No additional field setup is required. If a unit is to be converted to Horizontal discharge, the fol- lowing conversion must be performed: 1. If the unit has an economizer, it must be pulled out in the operating position. 2. Remove the 3 screws from the mounting brackets. Refer to Downflow View for screw locations. 00 Remove 3 Screws Downflow View Installation 3. Lift the tube and bracket from the downflow duct opening. Rotate the tube and bracket assembly 180° degrees en- suring that the holes on the copper sensing tube face away from the unit and face the return air ductwork. Refer to Horizontal View. Note: Check to insure that the flexible tubing lies flat on the base pan surface. 4. Slide the top bracket down the copper sensing tube, in- sert the tab on the left side into the slot on the indoor coil blockoff and secure the right side of the bracket with one of the 3 screws removed in step 2. Refer to Horizontal View. 18 5. Using the remaining 2 screws removed in step 2, secure the bottom bracket. Refer to Horizontal View. Slot • • 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 f 00 Horizontal View Main Electrical Power Requirements [ ] Verify that the power supply complies with the unit name- plate specifications. [ ] Inspect all control panel components; tighten any loose connections. [ ] Connect properly sized and protected power supply wir- ing to a field- supplied /installed disconnect switch and to the main power terminal block (HTB1) in the unit control panel. [ ] Install proper grounding wires to an earth ground. Note: All field- installed wiring must comply with NEC and applicable local codes. Electric Heat Requirements [ ] Verify that the power supply complies with the electric heater specifications on the unit and heater nameplate. [ ] Inspect the heater junction box and control panel; tighten any loose connections. [ ] Check electric heat circuits for continuity. • Low Voltage Wiring (AC & DC) Requirements Condensate Drain Configuration 8. Replace the front support panel by aligning the panel Installation [ ] Install the zone thermostat, with or without switching sub- base. [ ] Connect properly sized control wiring to the proper termi- nation points between the zone thermostat and the unit control panel. An evaporator condensate drain connection is provided on each unit. Refer to Figure 4 for the appropriate drain loca- tion. The condensate drain pan is factory installed to drain con- densate to the back side of the unit. See Figure 4. It can be converted to drain condensate out the front side of the unit or through the base. To convert drain condensate out the front of unit: 1. Remove evaporator access panel and supply air access panels. 2. Remove the support panel that the condensate drain pan exits through. 3. Slide the condensate drain pan out of the unit and rotate 180 °. 4. Slide the condensate drain pan back into the unit, align the drain with the grommeted opening in the rear support panel and push until the coupling is seated in the grom- met. 5. Replace the front support panel by aligning the panel with tabs in the raceway. Align the condensate drain pan support in the grommeted hole as the panel is put in place. 6. Replace evaporator access panel and supply air access panels. To convert drain condensate through the base of unit: 1. Remove evaporator access panel and supply air access panels. 2. Remove the support panel that the condensate drain pan exits through. 3. Slide the condensate drain pan out of the unit. 4. Place on a level surface in the position it was removed from the unit. 5. Remove the plug knockout in the bottom of the drainpan to convert it to through the base drainage. 6. Plug the original condensate drain opening with a field supplied 3/4" NPT plug. 7. Slide the condensate drain pan back into the unit, align the drain support with the grommeted opening in the rear support panel and push until the support is seated in the grommet. with tabs in the raceway. Align the plugged condensate drain pan coupling in the grommeted hole as the panel is put in place. 9. Replace evaporator access panel and supply air access panels. A condensate trap must be installed at the unit due to the drain connection being on the "negative pressure" side of the fan. Install the P -Trap using the guidelines in Figure 5. A condensate drain line must be connected to the P -Trap. Pitch the drain lines at least 1/2 inch for every 10 feet of horizontal run to assure proper condensate flow. Do not al- low the horizontal run to sag causing a possible double -trap condition which could result in condensate backup due to "air lock ". Figure 5 Condensate Trap Installation PANEL ENCLOSURE Filter Installation 19 75 INCH NPT FEMALE CONNECTOR CLEANOUT PLUG 381 MM Each unit ships with filters installed. The quantity of filters is determined by unit size. Access to the filters is obtained by removing the indoor fan access panel. To modify the 3, 4 or 5 ton unit's filter rack to accept two inch filters, remove the L- shaped angle attachment screws and rotate the angles 90 degrees. Reinstall the screws and insert new filters. Refer to the unit Service Facts (shipped with each unit) for filter require- ments. Note: Do not operate the unit without filters. Field Installed Power Wiring An overall dimensional 'layout for the field installed wiring entrance into the unit is illustrated in Figure 2. To insure that the unit's supply power wiring is properly sized and in- stalled, follow the guidelines outlined below. Note: All field installed wiring must conform to NEC guidelines as well as State and Local codes. Verify that the power supply available is compatible with the unit's nameplate ratings. The available supply power must be within 10% of the rated voltage stamped on the name- plate. Use only copper conductors to connect the power supply to the unit. L CAUTION Use Copper Conductors Only! Unit terminals are not designed to accept other types of conductors. Failure to use copper conductors may result in equipment damage. Failure to do so may cause damage to the equipment. Failure to do so may cause damage to the equipment. Installation Note: If the unit Is not equipped with an optional factory installed nonfused disconnect switch or circuit breaker, a field supplied disconnect switch must be installed at or near the unit in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC latest edition). Main Unit Power Standard Wiring 1. Location of the applicable electrical service entrance is il- lustrated in Figure 2. Complete the unit's power wiring connections at Compressor Contactor # 1 (CC1) inside the unit control panel. Refer to the customer connection diagram that is shipped with the unit for specific termina- tion points. 2. Provide proper grounding for the unit in accordance with local and national codes. Main Unit Power Optional TBUE Wiring (Through the Base Electrical Option) 1. Location of the applicable electrical service is illustrated below. Refer to the customer connection diagram that is shipped with the unit for specific termination points. The termination points, depending on the customer option se- lected would be a factory mounted nonfused disconnect switch (UDC) or circuit breaker (UCB). If neither a factory mounted nonfused disconnect switch (UDC) or circuit breaker (UCB) was factory mounted, field wiring connec- tions should be terminated in the control box at Com- pressor Contactor # 1 (CC1). 20 2. Provide proper grounding for the unit in accordance with local and national codes. Note: Black Gasket is shipped from the factory and is located In the literature Ship With bag In the control box. Apply Black Gasket around conduit plate on all 4 sides after installation to prevent air leakage from the building entering the electrical enclosures. Note: Seal between wiring and conduit with Black Gasket or weather proof sealer to prevent air leakage from the building entering the electrical enclosures. Also seal around conduit and wiring at all roof and curb penetrations. CONTROL WIRING CONDUIT SEAL BETWEEN WIRING AND CONDUIT WITH WEATHER PROOF SEALER TO PREVENT AIR LEAKAGE BLACK GASKET___,X Field Installed Control Wiring Control Power Transformer FIELD POWERED CONVENIENCE OUTLET CONDUIT POWER WIRING CONDUIT An overall layout of the various control options available with the required number of conductors for each control de- vice is illustrated in Figure 6. Note: All field wiring must conform to NEC guidelines as well as state and local codes. The 24 volt control power transformers are to be used only with the accessories called out in this manual. Transformers rated greater than 50 VA are equipped with internal circuit breakers. If a circuit breaker trips, turn "Off" all power to the unit before attempting to reset it. • • Installation WARNING Hazardous Voltage! Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon- nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout pro- cedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently en- ergized. Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Failure to disconnect power before servicing can cause se- vere personal injury or death. The transformer is located in the control panel. The circuit breaker is located on the left side of the transformer and can be reset by pressing in on the black reset button. Controls using 24 VAC Before installing any connecting wiring, refer to Figure 2 for the electrical access locations provided on the unit and Table 3 -6 for AC conductor sizing guidelines, and; a. Use copper conductors unless otherwise specified. b. Ensure that the AC control wiring between the controls and the unit's termination point does not exceed three (3) ohms /conductor for the length of the run. Note: Resistance in excess of 3 ohms per conductor may cause component failure due to insufficient AC voltage supply. c. Be sure to check all loads and conductors for grounds, shorts, and mis- wiring. d. Do not run the AC low voltage wiring in the same conduit with the high voltage power wiring. e. Route low voltage wiring per illustrations on page 21. Table 2 24V AC Conductors Distance from Unit to Control 000 -460 feet 000 - 140 m 461 - 732 feet Recommended Wire Size 18 gauge .75 mm 16 gauge Controls using DC Analog Input/Outputs (Standard Low Voltage Multiconductor Wire) Before installing any connecting wiring between the unit and components utilizing a DC analog input \output signal, refer to Figure 2 for the electrical access locations provided on the unit. a. Table 3 lists the conductor sizing guidelines that must be followed when interconnecting the DC binary output de- vices and the system components utilizing a DC analog input \output signal to the unit. Note: Resistance in excess of 2.5 ohms per conductor can cause deviations in the accuracy of the controls. b. Ensure that the wiring between controls and the unit's ter- mination point does not exceed two and a half (2.5) ohms /conductor for the length of the run. c. Do not run the electrical wires transporting DC signals in or around conduit housing high voltage wires. d. Route low voltage wiring per illustrations on page 21. Table 3 DC Conductors Zone Sensor Module wiring Distance from Recommended Unit to Control Wire Size 0 - 150 feet 22 gauge 0 - 45.7 m .33 mm 151 - 240 feet 46 - 73.1 m 241 -385 feet Reliatel Conventional Thermostat Field Wiring Diagrams HEAT i OEMERG HEAT 0 NORM QQ E H E AT ORM THERMOSTAT ODA 20 gauge .50 mm 18 gauge HEAT 2 o- � I } W2 CON FAN oG It COOL AUTO • COOL COOL 2 • o — 2 ' x 2 —04-3- RTRM Installation J7 -1 " VAC) --0 J7 -8 --0 J7 -5 -0 J7 - -0 J7 - 3 �-0 J7 - J7 -7 -0 J7 -2 - J7-9 22 • • Reliatel Refrigeration Module In N 0 .Q e I-I -I 9 OO 0 o 3 0 00000 00 � 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 09 Installation 7 7 23 Reliatel Control Customer Low Voltage Routing- Smoke Detector - (ReliaTelTM only) Customer Low Voltage Wiring- Installation When interlocking System Sensor smoke detectors to- gether, all of the detectors must be powered from the same power supply. If multiple smoke detectors are required, all detectors must be disconnected from the HVAC unit power supply and connected together from another single source supply. Note: Do not interconnect smoke detectors together that have separate power supplies. Do not exceed ten smoke detectors on one power supply. Note: Multiple System Sensor smoke detectors are connected together using terminals 1 and 12 on each detector. 24 U UNP0WERED CONVENIENCE OUTLET SECURE FIELD INSTALLED WIRING FOR CONVENIENCE OUTLET WITH POP -IN WIRE TIE REFRIGERATION COMMUNICATION MODULE INTERFACE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE i m LTIr RELIATEL CONVENTIONAL WIRING ROUTE FIELD WIRING AS SHOWN AND SECURE WITH 2 WIRE TIES LTY Reliatel Control Customer Low Voltage Routing- Smoke Detector - (ReliaTelTM only) Customer Low Voltage Wiring- Installation When interlocking System Sensor smoke detectors to- gether, all of the detectors must be powered from the same power supply. If multiple smoke detectors are required, all detectors must be disconnected from the HVAC unit power supply and connected together from another single source supply. Note: Do not interconnect smoke detectors together that have separate power supplies. Do not exceed ten smoke detectors on one power supply. Note: Multiple System Sensor smoke detectors are connected together using terminals 1 and 12 on each detector. 24 U UNP0WERED CONVENIENCE OUTLET SECURE FIELD INSTALLED WIRING FOR CONVENIENCE OUTLET WITH POP -IN WIRE TIE REFRIGERATION MODULE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE 0 0 LTY RELIATEL TBU WIRING ROUTE FIELD WIRING AS SHOWN AND SECURE WITH 3 WIRE TIES OPTION TBU Reliatel Control Customer Low Voltage Routing- Smoke Detector - (ReliaTelTM only) Customer Low Voltage Wiring- Installation When interlocking System Sensor smoke detectors to- gether, all of the detectors must be powered from the same power supply. If multiple smoke detectors are required, all detectors must be disconnected from the HVAC unit power supply and connected together from another single source supply. Note: Do not interconnect smoke detectors together that have separate power supplies. Do not exceed ten smoke detectors on one power supply. Note: Multiple System Sensor smoke detectors are connected together using terminals 1 and 12 on each detector. 24 U UNP0WERED CONVENIENCE OUTLET SECURE FIELD INSTALLED WIRING FOR CONVENIENCE OUTLET WITH POP -IN WIRE TIE • • If you have supply and return smoke detectors in all HVAC units, you can connect a maximum of 5 HVAC units (10 de- tectors) up to one power supply. See the following field wir- ing example below. LINE E] VOLTEGE ': ;24VAC 0 O 0 0 II 24VAC • SUPPLY 12 • ?4VAC • RETURN 12 0 0 0 O 2■VAC SUPPL 12 • 24VAC RETURN 12 0 I • If • � • •A (24VAC • SUPPLY 12 4VAC RETURN 12 0 I 24VAC O SUPPLY 12 0 24VAC 0 RETURN 12 24VAC SUPPLY 120 24VAC RETURN IT RTU I RTU 2 RTU 3 RTU 4 RTU 5 Installation If you have more than 5 HVAC units, you can connect all the supplies together on one power supply (up to 10 HVAC units), and all the returns together (up to 10 HVAC units) on another power supply. See the following field wiring ex- ample below. VOLTAGE] RTU 2 RIO 3 RTU 4 RTU 5 RTU 6 RTU 7 RTU 8 RTU 9 RTU 10 24VAC 12 RETUR 11 �� 1 . RTU 1 EMI 2.'"C 12.1 �NVAC ' SWRr IL I � 24vAC ' 12 O I I:,: gg 24V . 1� RE 12 MAC 24VAC m TiRN H MI ND 11 1 : TT Mil g III v S I PP L Y 12 . 0 \; 12 RETU • 1 ' U . V SIPRr 12 . 1p. 24y . 11 1. . 12 RETIRi _ MEN U kW i 24 VAE 24VAC :0 L . RETURN 112• "� r „ • 1 ==== 24VAC I 2 VAC [V OE 12 RETURN 0 LLL�� , ,-. S1PPL r 1 12 I 24VAC 12 RETURN O� J • • If you have supply and return smoke detectors in all HVAC units, you can connect a maximum of 5 HVAC units (10 de- tectors) up to one power supply. See the following field wir- ing example below. LINE E] VOLTEGE ': ;24VAC 0 O 0 0 II 24VAC • SUPPLY 12 • ?4VAC • RETURN 12 0 0 0 O 2■VAC SUPPL 12 • 24VAC RETURN 12 0 I • If • � • •A (24VAC • SUPPLY 12 4VAC RETURN 12 0 I 24VAC O SUPPLY 12 0 24VAC 0 RETURN 12 24VAC SUPPLY 120 24VAC RETURN IT RTU I RTU 2 RTU 3 RTU 4 RTU 5 Installation If you have more than 5 HVAC units, you can connect all the supplies together on one power supply (up to 10 HVAC units), and all the returns together (up to 10 HVAC units) on another power supply. See the following field wiring ex- ample below. VOLTAGE] RTU 2 RIO 3 RTU 4 RTU 5 RTU 6 RTU 7 RTU 8 RTU 9 RTU 10 24VAC 12 RETUR 11 �� 1 . RTU 1 EMI 2.'"C 12.1 �NVAC ' SWRr IL I � 24vAC ' 12 O I I:,: gg 24V . 1� RE 12 MAC 24VAC m TiRN H MI ND 11 1 : TT Mil g III v S I PP L Y 12 . 0 \; 12 RETU • 1 ' U . V SIPRr 12 . 1p. 24y . 11 1. . 12 RETIRi _ MEN U kW i 24 VAE 24VAC :0 L . RETURN 112• "� r „ • 1 ==== 24VAC I 2 VAC [V OE 12 RETURN 0 LLL�� Space Temperature Averaging (ReliaTelTM only) Space temperature averaging is accomplished by wiring a number of remote sensors in a series /parallel circuit. Using the BAYSENSO16* or BAYSENSO17 *, at least four sensors are required to accomplish space temperature av- eraging. Example #1 illustrates two series circuits with two sensors in each circuit wired in parallel. The square of any number of remote sensors is required. Example #2 illus- trates three sensors squared in a series /parallel circuit. Us- ing BAYSENSO32 *, two sensors are required to accomplish space temperature averaging. Example #3 illustrates the circuit required for this sensor. Table 4 lists the temperature versus resistance coefficient for all sensors. EXAMPLE #1 ZSM EXAMPLE #2 ZSM O #1 - 9 9 L � riT I L L_ EXAMPLE #3 ZSM REMOTE SENSORS O 2 # #1 9 REMOTE SENSORS REMOTE SENSORS # # 9 9 #9 -? 9 Pre - start # 1 T 4 9 J 1 I ZSM TERMINAL N 1 26 Remote Sensor #3 Remote Sensor 9VVVV? 9VVVV Remote Sensor #1 Remote Sensor #2 Remote Sensor #3 VVVV'P VVVVVW IVVVV Remote Sensor #4 Remote Sensor #5 Remote Sensor — gVVVVW /vvvv 1VVVVP Remote Sensor #7 Remote Sensor #R Remote Sensor yVVVV? 1VVVVh 9VVVV ZSM TERMINAL 4 I ZSM TERMINAL @ 1 Remote Sensor `1 Remote Sensor #2 VVVV 1VVVV Remote Sensor #1 Remote Sensor #2 VVVV VVVV VVVV VVVV ZSM TERMINAL 4 2 ZSM TERMINAL / 2 ZSM TERMINAL # 2 RTRM RTRM ECA Y 1 2 7 1 9 6 7 8 9 10 II 12 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ? 0 0 0 ? 0 W JS "{ Pbs J5 poilMn POIeNawel4e s- , 1 I Y 1 2 7 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 I/ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 I III - - -1 1 I I I I � - -- I I I I - - 1 I I - - - - -- 1 1 1 III I 11 BAYSENS017B 11. I I I I I � I I I I L -1 -1 I-- 1 1 1 1 lin I I I I I I 1 I ASYSTAT669A OPTION REMOTE SENSOR 0 0 © ®0 I© © ©® 1 I ewe Ile �JJYVJ�o- J Rs4 J yoil BAYSENS0198 ASYSTAT666A ZONE I 1111 1 1 ( � 1 1 1 1 1 1, \ C l ��I/ T 81 TB2 CUT WIRE ZONE SENSOR ®u� ® 24-, BAYSEN5007B ZONE SENSOR BAYSTAT023A 6361L3E D1103/71 IBD; ref r7w,4++ sa.. — JUMPER ADJACENT WHEN OPTIONAL TO TERMINAL 1 ON REMOTE SENSOR IS USED. 111 SENSOR I[%JI uromm sm.mw C.100.1. � 1 ' MIMIC 9806 RTRM BAYSENS017B ASYSTAT669A OPTION REMOTE SENSOR RTRM RM71f SAVED '"NIN2" - 6 i6 66 IAC70117 BAWRST001A _ __ 1 1 1 I 1 l_isEd—EJ D sOdy ast / \ Dud 11191 1.57111 CANNA High Lind Canal X1310004001 X1310004002 A 1 2 3 4 7 6 7 8 9 10 II 12 H 0 p 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y 1 2 3 1 5 6 7 0 9 10 11 12 M 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I� 1 L 1 I 1 1 1111111 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1`1, i iii i II 1 1 [O10] BAYSENS013C ZONE SENSOR IT T®®0 ©®a I ©a ® ® ®I TB1 TB2 CUT WIRE ZONE SENSOR ® IN r BAYSENS009B ZONE SENSOR ICS WITH OVERRIDE AND CANCELLATION BUTTON 2A 0 2A — JUMPER ADJACENT WHEN OPTIONAL TO TERMINAL 1 ON REMOTE SENSOR IS USED. RTRM RTRM 6 6 6 6 6 I 4W66E1C7 SRN r -- 1 r - 1 MN MAW Y 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 9 ID 11 12 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 II 12 14 9000000000000 1 I 11 1 L 1 L - I i 1 1 i I 1 . , L - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L 1 I l 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I I BAYSENSO178 I !III I I _ R�ION OA%DO' SW Ma 7 �w • saw uYw 1 1 1 C)©© BAYSENS014C ZONE SENSOR ASYSTAT669A I I I I I I OPTION REMOTE SENSOR [0JJ 0 0 0 © ©©°O TB1 TB2 ® u-' BAYSENS011B ZONE SENSOR ICS WITH SETPOINT,OVERRIDE AND CANCELLATION BUTTON CUT WIRE ZONE SENSOR ® 24-, JUMPER ADJACENT TO TERMINAL 1 ON WHEN OPTIONAL REMOTE SENSOR IS USED CO\TROL BOX RTRM 6 6 6 6 6 ,160000000000000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ID II 1214 RTRy ==_,,== ? 71117* 14 I 2 1,,, 8 . o; eeesee LTB I. t mat 0 • • Figure 6 Typical Field Wiring Diagrams for Optional Controls Pre -start Degrees F° Degrees C° Nominal Resistance -20° -28.9° 170.1 K - Ohms -15° -26.1° 143.5 K - Ohms -10° -23.3° 121.4 K - Ohms -5° -20.6° 103.0 K - Ohms 0° - 17.8° 87.56 K - Ohms 5° -15.0° 74.65 K - Ohms 10° -12.2° 63.80 K - Ohms 15° -9.4° 54.66 K - Ohms 20° -6.7° 46.94 K - Ohms 25° -3.8° 40.40 K - Ohms 30° -1.1° 34.85 K - Ohms 35° 1.7° 30.18 K - Ohms 40° 4.4° 26.22 K - Ohms 45° 7.2° 22.85 K - Ohms 50° 10.0° 19.96 K - Ohms 55° 12.8° 17.47 K - Ohms 60° 15.6° 15.33 K - Ohms 65° 18.3° 13.49 K - Ohms 70° 21.1° 11.89 K - Ohms 75° 23.9° 10.50 K - Ohms 80° 26.7° 9.297 K - Ohms 85° 29.4° 8.247 K -Ohms 90° 32.2° 7.330 K - Ohms 95° 35.0° 6.528 K - Ohms Table 4 Temperature versus Resistance (temperature vs resistance coefficient is negative) Temperature Pre -start Use the checklist provided below in conjunction with the "General Unit Requirements" checklist to ensure that the unit is properly installed and ready for operation. AL WARNING Hazardous Voltage! Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon- nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert- ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser- vicing could result in death or serious injury. Failure to disconnect power before servicing can cause se- vere personal injury or death. [ ] Check all electrical connections for tightness and "point of termination" accuracy. [ ] Verify that the condenser airflow will be unobstructed. [ ] Verify that the condenser fan and indoor blower turn freely without rubbing and are properly tightened on the shafts. [ ] Check the supply fan belts for proper tension and the fan bearings for sufficient lubrication. If the belts require ad- justment, or if the bearings need lubricating, refer to the maintenance section of this manual for instructions. [ ] Verify that a condensate trap is installed and the piping is properly sized and pitched. 28 [ ] Verify that the correct size and number of filters are in place. [ ] Inspect the interior of the unit for tools and debris and in- stall all panels in preparation for starting the unit. Voltage Imbalance Three phase electrical power to the unit must meet stringent requirements for the unit to operate properly.' Measure each leg (phase -to- phase) of the power supply. Each reading must fall within the utilization range stamped on the unit name- plate. If any of the readings do not fall within the proper toler- ances, notify the power company to correct this situation be- fore operating the unit. Excessive three phase voltage imbalance between phases will cause motors to overheat and eventually fail. The maxi- mum allowable voltage imbalance is 2 %. Measure and record the voltage between phases 1, 2, and 3 and calculate the amount of imbalance as follows: % Voltage Imbalance = 100 X AV - VD where; AV AV (Average Voltage) = Volt 1 + Volt 2 + Volt 3 3 V1, V2, V3 = Line Voltage Readings VD = Line Voltage reading that deviates the farthest from the average voltage. Example: If the voltage readings of the supply power mea- sured 221, 230, and 227, the average volts would be: 221 + 230 + 22 = 226 Avg. 3 VD (reading farthest from average) = 221 The percentage of Imbalance equals: 100X226 -221 =2.2% 226 The 2.2% imbalance in this example exceeds the maximum allowable imbalance of 2.0 %. This much imbalance between phases can equal as much as a 20% current imbalance with a resulting increase in motor winding temperatures that will decrease motor life. If the voltage imbalance is over 2 %, no- tify the proper agencies to correct the voltage problem before operating this equipment. Electrical Phasing (Three Phase Motors) The compressor motor(s) and the supply fan motor are inter- nally connected for the proper rotation when the incoming power supply is phased as A, B, C. Proper electrical supply phasing can be quickly determined and corrected before starting the unit by using an instrument such as an Associated Research Model 45 Phase Sequence Indicator and following the steps below: • • [ ] Turn the field supplied disconnect switch that provides power to the main power terminal block or to the "Line" side of the optional factory mounted disconnect switch to the "Off' position. [ ] Connect the phase sequence indicator leads to the termi- nal block or to the "Line" side of the optional factory mounted disconnect switch as follows; Black (phase A) to Red (phase B) to Yellow (phase C) to [ ] Close the field supplied main power disconnect switch or circuit protector switch that provides the supply power to the unit. WARNING Live Electrical Components! During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this product, it may be necessary to work with live elec- trical components. Have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or serious injury. To prevent injury or death from electrocution, it is the respon- sibility of the technician to recognize this hazard and use ex- treme care when performing service procedures with the electrical power energized. [ ] Observe the ABC and CBA phase indicator lights on the face of the sequencer. The ABC indicator light will glow if the phase is ABC. If the CBA indicator light glows, open the disconnect switch or circuit protection switch and re- verse any two power wires. [] L1 L2 L3 Pre -start Restore the main electrical power and recheck the phas- ing. If the phasing is correct, open the disconnect switch or circuit protection switch and remove the phase sequence indicator. Compressor Crankcase Heaters (Optional - standard in WSC048E3, 4, W & WSC060E units) Each compressor can be equipped with a crankcase heater. The proper operation of the crankcase heater is important to maintain an elevated compressor oil temperature during the "Off' cycle to reduce oil foaming during compressor starts. Oil foaming occurs when refrigerant condenses in the compres- sor and mixes with the oil. In lower ambient conditions, refrig- erant migration to the compressor could increase. When the compressor starts, the sudden reduction in crank- case pressure causes the liquid refrigerant to boil rapidly causing the oil to foam. This condition could damage com- pressor bearings due to reduced lubrication and could cause compressor mechanical failures. 29 Before starting the unit in the "Cooling" mode, set the sys- tem switch to the "Off' position and turn the main power disconnect to the "On" position and allow the crankcase heater to operate a minimum of 8 hours. Before closing the main power disconnect switch, insure that the "System" selection switch is in the "Off' position and the "Fan" selection switch is in the "Auto" position. Close the main power disconnect switch and the unit mounted disconnect switch, if applicable. WARNING Live Electrical Components! During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshoot- ing of this product, it may be necessary to work with live electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electri- cian or other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or serious injury. To prevent injury or death from electrocution, it is the re- sponsibility of the technician to recognize this hazard and use extreme care when performing service procedures with the electrical power energized. Upon power initialization, the RTRM performs self- diagnos- tic checks to insure that all internal controls are functional. It also checks the configuration parameters against the com- ponents connected to the system. The Liteport LED located on the RTRM module is turned "On" within one second of power -up if internal operation is okay. Use one of the following "Test" procedure to bypass some time delays and to start the unit at the control panel. Each step of unit operation can be activated individually by tem- porarily shorting across the "Test" terminals for two to three seconds. The Liteport LED located on the RTRM module will blink when the test mode has been initiated. The unit can be left in any "Test" step for up to one hour be- fore it will automatically terminate, or it can be terminated by opening the main power disconnect switch. Once the test mode has been terminated, the Liteport LED will glow continuously and the unit will revert to the "System" control. Test Modes Pre -Start There are three methods in which the "Test" mode can be cycled at LTB -Test 1 and LTB -Test 2. 1. Step Test Mode - This method initiates the different com- ponents of the unit, one at a time, by temporarily shorting across the two test terminals for two to three seconds. For the initial start-up of the unit, this method allows the technician to cycle a component "On" and have up to one hour to complete the check. 2. Resistance Test Mode - This method can be used for start- up providing a decade box for variable resistance out- puts is available. This method initiates the different com- ponents of the unit, one at a time, when a specific resis- tance value is placed across the two test terminals. The unit will remain in the specific test mode for approxi- mately one hour even though the resistance is !left on the test terminals. 3. Auto Test Mode - This method is not recommended for start-up due to the short timing between individual com- ponent steps. This method initiates the different compo- nents of the unit, one at a time, when a jumper is in- stalled across the test terminals. The unit will start the first test step and change to the next step every 30 seconds. At the end of the test mode, control of the unit will auto- matically revert to the applied "System" control method. For unit test steps, test modes, and step resistance values to cycle the various components, refer to Table 5. ReliaTel Controls Upon power initialization, the RTRM performs self- diagnos- tic checks to insure that all internal controls are functional. It also checks the configuration parameters against the com- ponents connected to the system. The Liteport LED located an the RTRM module is turned "On" within one second of power -up if internal operation is okay. Use one of the following `Test" procedure to bypass some time delays and to start the unit at the control panel. Each step of unit operation can be activated individually by tem- porarily shorting across the "Test" terminals for two to three seconds. The Liteport LED located on the RTRM module will blink when the test mode has been initiated. The unit can be left in any "Test" step for up to one hour before it will automatically terminate, or it can be terminated by opening the main power disconnect switch. Once the test mode has been terminated, the Liteport LED will glow continuously and the unit will revert to the "System" control. 30 TEST STEP MODE Fan Econ (Note 2) Comp 1 Comp 2 Heat 1 Heat 2 Ohms 1 Fan On Minimum Position Setpoint 0% Off Off Off Off 2.2K Minimum Ventilation On Selectable Off Off Off Off 2 Economizer Test Open On Open Off Off Off Off 3.3K 3 Cool Stage 1 On Minimum Position (Note 1) On Off Off Off 4.7K 4 (Note 3) Cool Stage 2 On Minimum Position (Note 1) On (Note 1) On Off Off 6.8K 5 (Note 3) Reheat On Minimum On On Off Off 33K 6 (Note 3) Heat Stage 1 On Minimum Off Off On Off 10K 7 (Note 3) Heat Stage 2 On Minimum Off Off On On 15K • • Table 5 Service Test Guide for Component Operation Start -Up Notes: 1 - The condenser fans will operate any time a compressor is "On" providing the outdoor air temperatures are within the operating values. Verifying Proper Air Flow (Units with Two Speed Direct Drive Indoor Fan) Much of the systems performance and reliability is closely associated with, and dependent upon having the proper airflow supplied both to the space that is being conditioned and across the evaporator coil. The indoor fan motor is factory wired to operate on low speed in the cooling and heating mode. It can be rewired for high speed operation should the application require it. Refer to the wiring diagram that shipped in the unit. The indoor fan motors are specifically designed to operate within the BHP parameters listed in the fan performance tables of the unit Service Facts. By understanding that these motors will safely work within these conditions, before an oversized motor is required, will allow the air distribution system to be set up properly and diagnostics enhanced should a problem occur. When verifying direct drive fan performance, the tables must be used somewhat differently than those of belt driven fans. Fan performance diagnostics can be easily recognized when these tables are used correctly. Before starting the SERVICE TEST, set the minimum position setpoint for the economizer to 0 percent using the setpoint potentiometer located on the Economizer Control (ECA), if applicable. ReliaTel Control Using the Service Test Guide in Table 5, momentarily jump across the Test 1 & Test 2 terminals on LTB1 one time to start the Minimum Ventilation Test. With the fan operating properly, determine the total system external static pressure (inches w.c.) by; 1. Measuring the supply and return duct static pressure, 2. Using the accessory pressure drop table in the Service Facts, calculate the total static pressure drop for all of the accessories installed on the unit; i.e., curb, economizer, etc. Note: Static pressure is based on desired CFM and may not be actual static pressure. 3. Add the total accessory static pressure drop (step 2) to the duct external static pressure (step 1). The sum of these two values represents the total system external static pressure. 4. Measure the amperage at the supply fan contactor and compare it with the full load amp (FLA) rating stamped on the motor nameplate. a. Calculate the theoretical BHP Actual Motor Amps X Motor HP Motor Nameplate Amps Start -U p b. Using the fan performance tables in the unit Service Facts, plot the total external static pressure (step 3) and the BHP (step 4a) to obtain the operating CFM. c. When plotted, if the two values can not be interpolated correspondingly, the static pressure will most likely be the least accurate measurement. Because of the direct drive motor operation, the RPM performance is relatively constant making the operating current a very reliable diagnostic tool. Example: W_D060 single phase, low speed. Actual Motor Amp (5.25) = .99% Motor Nameplate Amps (5.3) 0.99 X Motor HP (0.6) = .59 BHP The actual external static pressure is approximately 0.45" w.c., airflow equals 2100 CFM. If the static pressure reading was higher, motor current would have to be lower proportionately to get an accurate CFM measurement in direct drive applications. 5. If the required CFM is too low, (external static pressure is high causing motor HP output to be below table value), a. Relieve supply and /or return duct static. b. Change indoor fan speed to "High" and repeat steps 1 through 4. 6. If the required CFM is too high, (external static pressure is low causing motor HP output to be above table value), increase supply and /or return duct static. 7. To stop the SERVICE TEST, turn the main power discon- nect switch to the "Off" position or proceed to the next component start-up procedure. Verifying Proper Air Flow (Units with Belt Drive Indoor Fan) Much of the systems performance and reliability is closely associated with, and dependent upon having the proper air- flow supplied both to the space that is being conditioned and across the evaporator coil. The indoor fan speed is changed by opening or closing the adjustable motor sheave. Before starting the SERVICE TEST, set the minimum posi- tion setpoint for the economizer to 0 percent using the setpoint potentiometer located on the Economizer Control (ECA), if applicable. 32 ReliaTel Control Using the Service Test Guide in Table 5, momentarily jump across the Test 1 & Test 2 terminals on LTB1 one time to start the Minimum Ventilation Test. Once the supply fan has started, check for proper rotation. The direction of rotation is indicated by an arrow on the fan housing. With the fan operating properly, determine the total system airflow (CFM) by; 1. Measuring the actual RPM, 2. Measure the amperage at the supply fan contactor and compare it with the full load amp (FLA) rating stamped on the motor nameplate. a. Calculate the theoretical BHP Actual Motor Amps X Motor HP Motor Nameplate Amps b. Using the fan performance tables in the unit Service Facts, plot the actual RPM (step 1) and the BHP (step 2a) to obtain the operating CFM. 3. If the required CFM is too low, (external static pressure is high causing motor HP output to be below table value), a. Relieve supply and /or return duct static. b. Change indoor fan speed and repeat steps 1 and 2. 1. To Increase Fan RPM; Loosen the pulley adjustment set screw and turn sheave clockwise. 2. To Decrease Fan RPM; Loosen the pulley adjustment set screw and turn sheave counterclockwise. 3. If the required CFM is too high, (external static pressure is low causing motor HP output to be above table value), change indoor fan speed and repeat steps 1 and 2. 4. To stop the SERVICE TEST, turn the main power discon- nect switch to the "Off" position or proceed to the next component start-up procedure. Verifying Proper Air Flow (Units with 5 -Tap Direct Drive Indoor Fan) Much of the systems performance and reliability is closely associated with, and dependent upon having the proper air- flow supplied both to the space that is being conditioned and across the evaporator coil. The indoor fan motor is factory wired to operate on speed tap 1 in the cooling and heating mode for electric/electric units. For Gas /Electric units, the motor is factory wired to op- erate on speed tap 1 during cooling. For 3 & 4 ton Gas/ Electric units operating in heat mode, the minimum setting is Tap 4. For these units, a separate tap terminal is provided to change speeds automatically between heating and cool- ing. The motor can be rewired for different speed settings should the application require it. Refer to the wiring diagram that shipped in the unit and the unit fan performance tables in the Service Facts. • • • • Start -Up The indoor fan motors are specifically designed to operate within the BHP parameters listed in the fan performance tables of the unit Service Facts. When verifying direct drive fan performance, the tables must be used somewhat differently than those of belt driven fans. Fan performance diagnostics can be easily recognized when these tables are used correctly. Before starting the SERVICE TEST, set the minimum posi- tion setpoint for the economizer to 0 percent using the setpoint potentiometer located on the Economizer Control (ECA), if applicable. ReliaTel Control Using the Service Test Guide in Table 5, momentarily jump across the Test 1 & Test 2 terminals on LTB1 one time to start the Minimum Ventilation Test. With the fan operating properly, determine the total system external static pressure (inches w.c.) by the following method: 1. Measure the supply and return duct static pressure and sum the resulting absolute values, 2. Use the accessory pressure drop table in the Service Facts, to calculate the total static pressure drop for all of the accessories installed on the unit; i.e., curb, econo- mizer, etc. Note: Accessory static pressure drop is based on desired CFM and may not be actual static pressure drop. 3. Add the total accessory static pressure drop (step 2) to the duct external static pressure (step 1). The sum of these two values represents the total system external static pressure. Using the Fan Performance Tables in the Service Facts, look up the selected speed tap setting and match the measured ESP to determine the approximate CFM. If the required CFM is too low, (external static pressure is high) do one or both of the following and repeat procedure: a. Relieve supply and /or return duct static. b. Change indoor fan speed tap to a higher value If the required CFM is too high, (external static pressure is low), do one or both of the following and repeat procedure: a. Increase supply and /or return duct static. b. Change indoor fan speed tap to a lower value. Note: Minimum setting for units with Gas or Electric Heat is 320 CFM per Ton. For 3 & 4 Ton Gas Heat units operating in heating mode the heat speed set cannot be lower than Speed Set 4. 4. To stop the SERVICE TEST, turn the main power discon- nect switch to the "Off' position or proceed to the next component start-up procedure. Return Air Smoke Detector The return air smoke detector is designed to shut off the unit if smoke is sensed in the return air stream. Sampling the air- flow entering the unit at the return air opening performs this function. In order for the smoke detector to properly sense smoke in the return air stream, the air velocity entering the unit must be between 500 and 4000 feet per minute. Equipment cov- ered in this manual will develop an airflow velocity that falls within these limits over the entire airflow range specified in the evaporator fan performance tables. There are certain models however, if operated at low air- flow, will not develop an airflow velocity that falls within the required 500 to 4000 feet per minute range. For these mod- els, the design airflow shall be greater than or equal to the minimum CFM specified in the table provided below. Failure to follow these instructions will prevent the smoke detector from performing its design function. Economizer Start-Up ReliaTel Control Using the Service Test Guide in Table 5, momentarily jump across the Test 1 & Test 2 terminals on LTB1 one time to start the Minimum Ventilation Test. 1. Set the minimum position setpoint for the economizer to the required percentage of minimum ventilation using the setpoint potentiometer located on the Economizer Con- trol (ECA). The economizer will drive to its minimum position setpoint, exhaust fans (if applicable) may start at random, and the supply fan will start when the SERVICE TEST is initiated. WARNING Rotating Components! During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this product it may be necessary to measure the speed of rotating components. Have a qualified or li- censed service individual who has been properly trained in handling exposed rotating components, perform these tasks. Failure to follow all safety precautions when ex- posed to rotating components could result in death or se- rious injury. The Exhaust Fan will start anytime the economizer damper position is equal to or greater than the exhaust fan setpoint. 2. Verify that the dampers stroked to the minimum position. 3. ReliaTel Control Momentarily jump across the Test 1 & Test 2 terminals on LTB1 one additional time if continuing from previous component start-up or until the desired start-up compo- nent Test is started. 4. Verify that the dampers stroked to the full open position. 5. To stop the SERVICE TEST, turn the main power discon- nect switch to the "Off' position or proceed to the next component start-up procedure. 33 Start -Up Compressor Start-Up Using the Service Test Guide in Table 5, continue the SER- VICE TEST start-up procedure for each compressor circuit. 1. Attach a set of service gauges onto the suction and dis- charge gauge ports for each circuit. Refer to the refriger- ant circuit illustration in the Service Facts. 2. Momentarily jump across the Test 1 & Test 2 terminals on LTB one additional time if continuing from previous com- ponent start-up or until the desired start-up component Test is started. Scroll Compressors a. Once each compressor has started, verify that the rotation is correct. If a scroll compressor is rotating backwards, it will not pump and a loud rattling sound can be observed. b. If the electrical phasing is correct, before condemning a compressor, interchange any two leads (at the compres- sor Terminal block) to check the internal phasing. Refer to the illustration in Figure 5 -1 for the compressor terminal/ phase identification. If the compressor runs backward for an extended period (15 to 30 minutes), the motor wind- ing can overheat and cause the motor winding thermo- stat to open. 3. After the compressor and condenser fan have started and operated for approximately 30 minutes, observe the op- erating pressures. Compare the operating pressures to the operating pressure curve in the Service Facts. 4. Check system superheat. Follow the instruction listed on the superheat charging curve in the Service Facts. Superheat should be within ±5 F of the superheat chart value. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for each refrigerant circuit. 6. To stop the SERVICE TEST, turn the main power discon- nect switch to the "Off position or proceed to the next component start-up procedure. Heating Start-Up Using the Service Test Guide in Table 5, continue the SER- VICE TEST start-up procedure for each compressor circuit. 1. Clamp an amp meter around one of 1st stage heater power wires at the heater contactor. 2. Momentarily jump across the Test 1 & Test 2 terminals on LTB one additional time if continuing from previous com- ponent start-up or until the desired start-up component Test is started. 3. Verify that the heater stage is operating properly. 4. Clamp an amp meter around one of 2nd stage heater power wires at the heater contactor (if applicable). 5. Momentarily jump across the Test 1 & Test 2 terminals on LTB one additional time if continuing from previous com- ponent start-up or until the desired start-up component Test is started. 34 6. Verify that the heater stage is operating properly. 7. To stop the SERVICE TEST, turn the main power discon- nect switch to the "Off" position or proceed to the next component start-up procedure. Final System Setup After completing all of the pre -start and start-up procedures outlined in the previous sections (i.e., operating the unit in each of its Modes through all available stages of cooling & heating), perform these final checks before leaving the unit: [ ] Program the Night Setback (NSB) panel (if applicable) for proper unoccupied operation. Refer to the programming instructions for the specific panel. [ ] Verify that the Remote panel "System" selection switch, "Fan" selection switch, and "Zone Temperature" settings for automatic operation are correct. [ ] Inspect the unit for misplaced tools, hardware, and debris. [ ] Verify that all exterior panels including the control panel doors and condenser grilles are secured in place. [ ] Close the main disconnect switch or circuit protector switch that provides the supply power to the unit's termi- nal block or the unit mounted disconnect switch. AL WARNING Live Electrical Components! During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this product, it may be necessary to work with live electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electri- cian or other individual who Chas been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or serious injury. Make sure all personnel are standing clear of the unit before proceeding. The system components will start when the power is applied. Fan Belt Adjustment - Belt Drive Units AL WARNING Rotating Components! Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon- nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout pro- cedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently en- ergized. Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. The fan belts must be inspected periodically to assure proper unit operation. Replacement is necessary if the belts appear frayed or worn. Units with dual belts require a matched set of belts to ensure equal belt length. When removing or installing the new belts, do not stretch them over the sheaves. Loosen the belts using the belt ten- sion adjustment bolts on the motor mounting base. • • • • Once the new belts are installed, using a Browning or Gates tension gauge (or equivalent) illustrated in Figure 7; adjust the belt tension as follows; 1. To determine the appropriate belt deflection; a. Measure the center -to- center shaft distance (in inches) between the fan and motor sheaves. b. Divide the distance measured in Step la by 64; the resulting value represents the amount of belt deflection that corresponds to the proper belt tension. 2. Set the large 0-ring on the belt tension gauge at the de- flection value determined in Step lb. 3. Set the small 0-ring at zero on the force scale of the gauge plunger. 4. Place the large end of the gauge at the center of the belt span; then depress the gauge plunger until the large O- ring is even with the top of the next belt or even with a straightedge placed across the fan and motor sheaves. Refer to Figure 7. 5. Remove the belt tension gauge. The small 0-ring now in- dicates a number other than zero on the plunger's force scale. This number represents the force (in pounds) re- quired to give the needed deflection. 6. Compare the "force" scale reading (Step 5) with the ap- propriate "force" value listed in Table 6. If the "force" read- ing is outside the range, readjust the belt tension. Note: Actual belt deflection "force " must not exceed the maximum "force" value shown in Table 6. 7. Recheck the belt tension at least twice during the first 2 to 3 days of operation. Belt tension may decrease until the new belts are "run in ". Figure 7 BeltTension Gauge Deflection = Belt Span (in) 64 Deflection = Belt Span (mm) 152 Small 0 -Ring Large 0 -Ring Start -Up Force Scale Span Scale Table 6 Belt Tension Measurement and Deflection Ranges Small P.D Range 3.0 - 3.6 3.8 - 4.8 5.0 - 7.0 3.4 - 4.2 4.4 -5.6 5.8 - 8.8 Min. Max. 3 4 1/2 3 1/2 5 4 5 1/2 4 5 1/2 5 1/8 7 1/8 6 3/8 8 3/4 Min. Max. 37/8 51/2 4 1/2 6 1/4 5 6 7/8 5 3/4 8 6 1/2 9 1/8 7 3/8 10 1/8 Belts Cross Section A B Deflection Force (Lbs.) Super Steel Cable Gripbelts Gripnotch Gripbelts Min. Max 3 1/4 4 3 3/4 4 3/4 4 1/4 5 1/4 4 1/2 5 1/2 5 3/4 7 1/4 7 8 3/4 Monthly Maintenance Filters Return Air Smoke Detector Maintenance Cooling Season Maintenance Before completing the following checks, turn the unit OFF and lock the main power disconnect switch open. AL WARNING Rotating Components! Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon- nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout pro- cedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently en- ergized. Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Failure to disconnect power before servicing can cause se- vere personal injury or death. [ ] Inspect the return air filters. Clean or replace them if neces- sary. Refer to the unit Service Facts for filter information. Airflow through the unit is affected by the amount of dirt and debris accumulated on the indoor coil and filters. To insure that airflow through the unit is adequate for proper sampling by the return air smoke detector, complete adherence to the maintenance procedures, including recommended intervals between filter changes, and coil cleaning is required. Periodic checks and maintenance procedures must be per- formed on the smoke detector to insure that it will function properly. For detailed instructions concerning these checks and procedures, refer to the appropriate section(s) of the smoke detector Installation and Maintenance Instructions provided with the literature package for this unit. [ ] Check the unit's drain pans and condensate piping to en- sure that there are no blockages. [ ] Inspect the evaporator and condenser coils for dirt, bent fins, etc. If the coils appear dirty, clean them according to the instructions described in "Coil Cleaning" later in this section. [ ] Manually rotate the condenser fan(s) to ensure free move- ment and check motor bearings for wear. Verify that all of the fan mounting hardware is tight. [ ] Inspect the F /A -R/A damper hinges and pins to ensure that all moving parts are securely mounted. Keep the blades clean as necessary. [ ] Verify that all damper linkages move freely; lubricate with white grease, if necessary. [ ] Check supply fan motor bearings; repair or replace the mo- tor as necessary. [ ] Check the fan shaft bearings for wear. Replace the bear- ings as necessary. (] Check the supply fan belt. If the belt is frayed or worn, re- place it. Refer to the "Fan Belt Adjustment" section for belt replacement and adjustments. 36 [ ] Verify that all wire terminal connections are tight. [ ] Remove any corrosion present on the exterior surfaces of the unit and repaint these areas. [ ] Generally inspect the unit for unusual conditions (e.g., loose access panels, leaking piping connections, etc.) [ ] Make sure that all retaining screws are reinstalled in the unit access panels once these checks are complete. [ ] With the unit running, check and record the: ambient temperature; compressor suction and discharge pres- sures (each circuit); superheat (each circuit); Record this data on an "operator's maintenance log" like the one shown in Table 7. If the operating pressures indi- cate a refrigerant shortage, measure the system super- heat. For guidelines, refer to the "Compressor Start-Up" section. Note: Do Not release refrigerant to the atmosphere! If adding or removing refrigerant is required, the service technician must comply with all federal, state and local laws. Heating Season [ ] Inspect the unit's air filters. If necessary, clean or replace them. [ ] Check supply fan motor bearings; repair or replace the motor as necessary. [ ] Inspect both the main unit control panel and heat sec- tion control box for loose electrical components and ter- minal connections, as well as damaged wire insulation. Make any necessary repairs. [ ] Verify that the electric heat system operates properly. Coil Cleaning Regular coil maintenance, including annual cleaning, en- hances the unit's operating efficiency by minimizing: com- pressor head pressure and amperage draw; evaporator water carryover; fan brake horsepower, due to increase static pressure losses; airflow reduction. At least once each year, or more often if the unit is located in a "dirty" environment, clean the evaporator and con- denser coils using the instructions outlined below. Be sure to follow these instructions as closely as possible to avoid damaging the coils. Note: For units equipped with hall guards follow removal procedure listed below. Hail Guard Removal • Unlatch hail guards. • Pull the top of the hail guard outward until the fastener studs are free of the retaining nuts. • Lift the hail guard from the lower retaining bracket and set aside. Slide -style hail guard latch DETAIL A SLIDE LATCH PULL DOWN TO DISENGAGE GUARD 1. Remove enough panels from the unit to gain access to the coil. 3. Straighten any bent coil fins with a fin comb. Maintenance To clean refrigerant coils, use a soft brush and a sprayer (either a garden pump -up type or a high - pressure sprayer). A high - quality detergent is also required; suggested brands include "SPREXA.C. ", "OAKITE 161 ", "OAKITE 166" and "COILOX ". If the detergent selected is strongly alkaline (ph value exceeds 8.5), add an inhibitor. AL WARNING Hazardous Chemicals! Coil cleaning agents can be either acidic or highly alka- line. Handle chemical carefully. Proper handling should include goggles or face shield, chemical resistant gloves, boots, apron or suit as required. For personal safety refer to the cleaning agent manufacturer's Materi- als Safety Data Sheet and follow all recommended safe handling practices. Failure to follow all safety instruc- tions could result in death or serious injury. 2. Protect all electrical devices such as motors and control- lers from any over spray. 4. Mix the detergent with water according to the manufacturer's instructions. If desired, heat the solution to 150 F maximum to improve its cleansing capability. ZS/WARNING Hazardous Pressures! Coils contain refrigerant under pressure. When cleaning coils, maintain coil cleaning solution temperature under 150 °F to avoid excessive pressure in the coil. Failure to follow these safety precautions could result in coil burst- ing, which could result in death or serious injury. Do not heat the detergent- and -water solution above 150° F. Hot liquids sprayed on the exterior of the coil will raise the coil's internal pressure and may cause it to burst. Failure to follow proper procedures can result in personal illness or injury or severe equipment damage. 37 5. Pour the cleaning solution into the sprayer. If a high -pres- sure sprayer is used: a. do not allow sprayer pressure to exceed 600 psi. b. the minimum nozzle spray angle is 15 degrees. c. maintain a minimum clearance of 6" between the sprayer nozzle and the coil. d. spray the solution perpendicular (at 90 degrees) to the coil face. 6. Spray the leaving - airflow side of the coil first; then spray the opposite side of the coil. Allow the cleaning solution to stand on the coil for five minutes. 7. Rinse both sides of the coil with cool, clean water. 8. Inspect both sides of the coil; if it still appears to be dirty, repeat Steps 6 and 7. 9. Reinstall all of the components and panels removed in Step 1 and any protective covers installed in step 2. Note: For units equipped with hail guards follow reinstallation procedure listed below. Hail Guard Reinstallation • To reinstall the hail guard, locate the bottom of the hail guard in the lower bracket and secure it to the upper unit bracket with the attached fasteners. Note: Secure hail guard latches. Ball -style hail guard latch TURN 90' CLOCKWISE TO SECURE GUARD FOLD BAIL HANDLE DOWN FOR STORAGE 10. Restore the unit to it's operational status and check sys- tem operation. Final Process For future reference, you may find it helpful to record the unit data requested below in the blanks provided. (1) Complete Unit Model Number: (2) Unit Serial Number: (3) Wiring Diagram Numbers (from unit control pan — schematic(s) — connection(s) Table 7 Sample Maintenance Log Current Ambient Compr. Suct. Temp. Oil Press. Trouble Shooting Refrigerant Circuit #1 Disch. Liquid Super - Press. Press. heat Date F Level Ps Pa Psi Pa Psi Pa F/C F/C 38 The RTRM has the ability to provide the service personnel with some unit diagnostics and system status information. Before turning the main power disconnect switch "Off, fol- low the steps below to check the ReliaTel Refrigeration Module (RTRM). All diagnostics & system status information stored in the RTRM will be lost when the main power is turned "Off ". WARNING Live Electrical Components! During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this product, it may be necessary to work with live electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electri- cian or other individual who !has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or serious injury. To prevent injury or death from electrocution, it is the re- sponsibility of the technician to recognize this hazard and use extreme care when performing service procedures with the electrical power energized. 1. Verify that the Liteport LED on the RTRM is burning con- tinuously. If the LED is lit, go to Step 3. 2. If the LED is not lit, verify that 24 VAC is presence be- tween J1 -1 and J1 -2. If 24 VAC is present, proceed to Step 3. If 24 VAC is not present, check the unit main power supply, check transformer (TNS1). Proceed to Step 3 if necessary. Sub - cool. Refrigerant Circuit #2 Compr. Suct. Disch. Liquid Super- Sub - Oil Press. Press. Press. heat cool. Level Psi Pa Psi Pa Psi Pa F/C F/C -ok - low -ok - low -ok - low -ok - low -ok - low -ok - low -ok - low -ok - low Nntp• Check and record the data requested above each month durina the cooling season with the unit running. Final Process For future reference, you may find it helpful to record the unit data requested below in the blanks provided. (1) Complete Unit Model Number: (2) Unit Serial Number: (3) Wiring Diagram Numbers (from unit control pan — schematic(s) — connection(s) Table 7 Sample Maintenance Log Current Ambient Compr. Suct. Temp. Oil Press. Trouble Shooting Refrigerant Circuit #1 Disch. Liquid Super - Press. Press. heat Date F Level Ps Pa Psi Pa Psi Pa F/C F/C 38 The RTRM has the ability to provide the service personnel with some unit diagnostics and system status information. Before turning the main power disconnect switch "Off, fol- low the steps below to check the ReliaTel Refrigeration Module (RTRM). All diagnostics & system status information stored in the RTRM will be lost when the main power is turned "Off ". WARNING Live Electrical Components! During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this product, it may be necessary to work with live electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electri- cian or other individual who !has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or serious injury. To prevent injury or death from electrocution, it is the re- sponsibility of the technician to recognize this hazard and use extreme care when performing service procedures with the electrical power energized. 1. Verify that the Liteport LED on the RTRM is burning con- tinuously. If the LED is lit, go to Step 3. 2. If the LED is not lit, verify that 24 VAC is presence be- tween J1 -1 and J1 -2. If 24 VAC is present, proceed to Step 3. If 24 VAC is not present, check the unit main power supply, check transformer (TNS1). Proceed to Step 3 if necessary. Sub - cool. Refrigerant Circuit #2 Compr. Suct. Disch. Liquid Super- Sub - Oil Press. Press. Press. heat cool. Level Psi Pa Psi Pa Psi Pa F/C F/C S 3. Utilizing "Method 1" or "Method 2" in the "System Status Diagnostic" section, check the following: System status Heating status Cooling status If a System failure is indicated, proceed to Step 4. If no failures are indicated, proceed to Step 5. 4. If a System failure is indicated, recheck Steps 1 and 2. If the LED is not lit in Step 1, and 24 VAC is present in Step 2, the RTRM has failed. Replace the RTRM. 5. If no failures are indicated, use one of the TEST mode procedures described in the "Unit Start-Up" section to start the unit. This procedure will allow you to check all of the RTRM outputs, and all of the external controls (re- lays, contactors, etc.) that the RTRM outputs energize, for each respective mode. Proceed to Step 6. 6. Step the system through all of the available modes, and verify operation of all outputs, controls, and modes. If a problem in operation is noted in any mode, you may leave the system in that mode for up to one hour while troubleshooting. Refer to the sequence of operations for each mode, to assist in verifying proper operation. Make the necessary repairs and proceed to Steps 7 and 8. 7. If no abnormal operating conditions appear in the test mode, exit the test mode by turning the power "Off' at the main power disconnect switch. 8. Refer to the individual component test procedures if other microelectronic components are suspect. System Status Checkout Procedure "System Status" is checked by using one of the following two methods: Method 1 If the Zone Sensor Module (ZSM) is equipped with a remote panel with LED status indication, you can check the unit within the space. If the ZSM does not have LED's, use Method 2. BAYSENS010B, BAYSENS011 B, BAYSENS019A, BAYSENS020A, BAYSENS021A & BAYSENS023A all have the remote panel indication fea- ture. The LED descriptions are listed below. LED 1 (System) "On" during normal operation. "Off' if a system failure occurs or the LED fails. "Flashing" indicates test mode. LED 2 (Heat) "On" when the heat cycle is operating. "Off' when the heat cycle terminates or the LED fails. "Flashing" indicates a heating failure. LED 3 (Cool) "On" when the cooling cycle is operating. "Off' when the cooling cycle terminates or the LED fails. "Flashing" indicates a cooling failure. LED 4 (Service) "On" indicates a clogged filter. "Off' during normal operation. "Flashing" indicates an evaporator fan failure Trouble Shooting Below is the complete listing of failure indication causes. System failure Check the voltage between terminals 6 and 9 on J6, it should read approximately 32 VDC. If no voltage is present, a System failure has occurred. Refer to Step 4 in the previ- ous section for the recommended troubleshooting proce- dure. Cooling Failure 1. Cooling and heating set point (slide pot) on the zone sen- sor has failed. Refer to the "Zone Sensor Test Procedure" section. 2. Zone temperature thermistor ZTEMP on ZTS failed. Refer to the "Zone Sensor Test Procedure" section. 3. CC1 or CC2 24 VAC control circuit has opened, check CC1 & CC2 coils, and any of the controls below that ap- ply to the unit (HPC1, HPC2). 4. LPC1 has opened during the 3 minute minimum "on time" during 4 consecutive compressor starts, check LPC1 or LPC2 by testing voltage between the J1 -8 & J3 -2 termi- nals on the RTRM and ground. If 24 VAC is present, the LPC's has not tripped. If no voltage is present, LPC's has tripped. Service Failure 1. If the supply fan proving switch has closed, the unit will not operate (when connected to RTOM), check the fan motor, belts, and proving switch. 2. Clogged filter switch has closed, check the filters. Simultaneous Heat and Cool Failure 1. Emergency Stop is activated Method 2 The second method for determining system status is done by checking voltage readings at the RTRM (J6). The system indication descriptions and the approximate voltages are listed below. System Failure Measure the voltage between terminals J6 -9 & J6 -6. Normal Operation = approximately 32 VDC System Failure = less than 1 VDC, approximately 0.75 VDC Test Mode = voltage alternates between 32 VDC & 0.75 VDC Heat Failure Measure the voltage between terminals J6 -7 & J6 -6. Heat Operating = approximately 32 VDC Heat Off = less than 1 VDC, approximately 0.75 VDC Heating Failure = voltage alternates between 32 VDC & 0.75 VDC Cool Failure Measure the voltage between terminals J6 -8 & J6 -6. Cool Operating = approximately 32 VDC Cool Off = less than 1 VDC, approximately 0.75 VDC Cooling Failure = voltage alternates between 32 VDC & 0.75 VDC 39 Zone Tem perature Nom Inal ZTEMP Resistance 50 F° 10.0 C° 19.9 K -Ohms 55 F° 12.8 C° 17.47 K -Ohms 60 F° 15.6 C° 15.3 K -Ohms 65 F° 18.3 C° 13.49 K -Ohms 70 F° 21.1 C° 11.9 K -Ohms 75 F° 23.9 C° 10.50 K -Ohms 80 F° 26.7 C 9.3 K -Ohms 85 F° 29.4 C° 8.25 K -Ohms 90 F° 32.2 C° 7.3 K -Ohms Service Failure Measure the voltage between terminals J6 -10 & J6 -6. Clogged Filter = Approximately 32 VDC. Normal = Less than 1 VDC, approximately 0.75 VDC Fan Failure = voltage alternates between 32 VDC & 0.75 VDC. To use LED's for quick status information at the unit, pur- chase a BAYSENS010B ZSM and connect wires with alliga- tor clamps to terminals 6 through 10. Connected each re- spective terminal wire (6 through 10) from the Zone Sensor to the unit J6 terminals 6 through 10. Note: If the system is equipped with a programmable zone sensor, BAYSENS019B the LED indicators will not function while the BAYSENS010A is connected. Resetting Cooling and Heating Lockouts Cooling Failures and Heating Lockouts are reset in an iden- tical manner. Method 1 explains resetting the system from the space; Method 2 explains resetting the system at the unit. Note: Before resetting Cooling Failures and Heating Lockouts check the Failure Status. Diagnostics by the methods previously explained. Diagnostics will be lost when the power to the unit is disconnected. Method 1 To reset the system from the space, turn the "Mode" selec- tion switch at the zone sensor to the "Off' position. After ap- proximately 30 seconds, turn the "Mode" selection switch to the desired mode, i.e. Heat, Cool or Auto. Method 2 To reset the system at the unit, cycle the unit power by turn- ing the disconnect switch "Off' and then "On ". Lockouts can be cleared through the building management system. Refer to the building management system instruc- tions for more information. Zone Temperature Sensor (ITS) Service Indicator The ZSM SERVICE LED is a generic indicator, that will sig- nal the closing of a Normally Open switch at any time, pro- viding the Indoor Motor (IDM) is operating. This indicator is usually used to indicate a clogged filter, or an air side fan failure. The RTRM will ignore the closing of this Normally Open switch for 2 (±1) minutes. This helps prevent nuisance SER- VICE LED indications. The exception is the LED will flash 40 seconds after the fan is turned "On" if the Fan Proving Switch is not made. Trouble Shooting 40 Clogged Filter Switch This LED will remain lit the entire time that the Normally Open switch is closed. The LED will be turned off immedi- ately after resetting the switch (to the Normally Open posi- tion), or any time that the IDM is turned "Off'. If the switch remains closed, and the IDM is turned "On ", the SERVICE LED will be turned "On" again after the 2 (±1) minute ignore delay. This LED being turned "On ", will have no other affect on unit operation. It is an indicator only. Fan Failure Switch When the "Fan Failure" switch is wired to the RTOM, the LED will remain flashing the entire time the fan proving switch is closed, indicating a fan failure, and it will shut the unit operations down. Zone Temperature Sensor (ZTS) Test Note: These procedures are not for programmable or digital models and are conducted with the Zone Sensor Module electrically removed from the system. Test 1 Zone Temperature Thermistor (ZTEMP) This component is tested by measuring the resistance be- tween terminals 1 and 2 on the Zone Temperature Sensor. Below are some typical indoor temperatures, and corre- sponding resistive values. Test 2 Cooling Set Point (CSP) and Heating Set Point (HSP) The resistance of these potentiometers are measured be- tween the following ZSM terminals. Refer to the chart above for approximate resistances at the given setpoints. Cool SP =Terminals 2 and 3 Range = 100 to 900 Ohms approximate Heat SP = Terminals 2 and 5 Range = 100 to 900 Ohms approximate • • Test 3 System Mode and Fan Selection The combined resistance of the Mode selection switch and the Fan selection switch can be measured between termi- nals 2 and 4 on the Zone Sensor. The possible switch com- binations are listed below with their corresponding resis- tance values. Test 4 LED Indicator Test, (SYS ON, HEAT, COOL & SERVICE) Method 1 Testing the LED using a meter with diode test function. Test both forward and reverse bias. Forward bias should mea- sure a voltage drop of 1.5 to 2.5 volts, depending on your meter. Reverse bias will show an Over Load, or open circuit indication if LED is functional. Method 2 Testing the LED with an analog Ohmmeter. Connect Ohm- meter across LED in one direction, then reverse the leads for the opposite direction. The LED should have at least 100 times more resistance in reverse direction, as compared with the forward direction. If high resistance in both direc- tions, LED is open. If low in both directions, LED is shorted. Method 3 To test LED's with ZSM connected to unit, test voltages at LED terminals on ZSM. A measurement of 32 VDC, across an unlit LED, means the LED has failed. Note: Measurements should be made from LED common (ZSM terminal 6 to respective LED terminal). Refer to the Zone Sensor Module (ZSM) Terminal Identification table at the beginning of this section. Programmable & Digital Zone Sensor Test Testing serial communication voltage 1. Verify 24 VAC is present between terminals J6 -14 & J6- 11. 2. Disconnect wires from J6 -11 and J6 -12. Measure the volt- age between J6 -11 and J6 -12, should be about 32 VDC. 3. Reconnect wires to terminals J6 -11 and J6 -12. Measure voltage again between J6 -11 and J6 -12, voltage should flash high and low every 0.5 seconds. The voltage on the low end will measure about 19 VDC, while the voltage on the high end will measure from approximately 24 to 38 VDC. 4. Verify all modes of operation, by running the unit through all of the steps in the "Test Modes" section discussed in "Unit Start -Up ". 5. After verifying proper unit operation, exit the test mode. Turn the fan on continuously at the ZSM, by pressing the button with the fan symbol. If the fan comes on and runs continuously, the ZSM is good. If you are not able to turn the fan on, the ZSM is defective. Trouble Shooting 41 ReliaTel Refrigeration Module (RTRM) Default Chart If the RTCI loses input from the building management sys- tem, the RTRM will control in the default mode after approxi- mately 15 minutes. If the RTRM loses the Heating and Cool- ing setpoint input, the RTRM will control in the default mode instantaneously. The temperature sensing thermistor in the Zone Sensor Module is the only component required for the "Default Mode" to operate. Unit Operation without a Zone Sensor This procedure is for temporary operation only. The econo- mizer and condenser fan cycling functions are disabled. 1. Open and Lock the unit disconnect switch. 2. Remove the Outside Air Sensor (OAS) from the con- denser section of unit. 3. Use two (2) wire nuts, to individually cap the wires. 4. Locate the RTRM (J6). Connect two (2) wires to terminals J6 -1 and 2. 5. Connect the sensor (OAS) using two wire nuts to the two (2) field supplied wires that were connected to terminals 1 and 2 on J6. Unit Economizer Control (ECA)Troubleshooting ReliaTel Control Verify Economizer Status by Economizer Actuator (ECA) LED indicator: OFF: No Power or Failure ON: Normal, OK to Economize Slow Flash: Normal, Not OK to Economize Fast Flash - 1/2 Second On / 2 Seconds Off: Error Code: Communications Failure Pulse Flash: 2 Seconds On / 1/2 Second Off: Error Code: 1 Flash: Actuator Fault 2 Flashes: CO2 Sensor 3 Flashes: RA Humidity Sensor 4 Flashes RA Temp Sensor 5 Flashes: OA Quality Sensor 6 Flashes: OA Humidity Sensor 7 Flashes: OA Temp Sensor 8 Flashes: MA Temp Sensor 9 Flashes: RAM Fault 10 Flashes: ROM Fault 11 Flashes: EEPROM F Limited Warranty Heat Pump WCC, WCD, WCH, WCM and WSC (Parts Only) Models Less Than 20 Tons for Residential Use* This limited warranty is extended by American Standard Inc., to the original purchaser and to any succeeding owner of thereat property to which the Heat Pump is originally affixed, and applies to products purchased and retained for use within the U.S.A. and Canada. If any part of your Heat Pump fails because of a manufacturing defect within five years from the date of the original purchase, Warrantor will furnish without charge the required replacement part. Any local transportation, related service labor, diagnosis calls, refrigerant and related items are not included. If the sealed motor - compressor fails because of a manufacturing defect within five years from the date of original purchase, Warrantor will furnish without charge the required replacement compressor. Any local transportation, related service labor, diagnosis calls, refrigerant and related items are not included. This limited warranty does not cover failure of your Heat Pump if it is damaged while in your possession, failure attributable or caused by unreasonable use of the Heat Pump and/or failure to properly maintain the Heat Pump as set forth in the Use and Care manual. This limited warranty applies to product installed on or after 10/1/2001 where product is manufactured after 1/1/2000. This limited warranty is not retroactive to any installations prior to 10/1/2001 or on product produced prior to 2000. THE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LIABILITY SET FORTH HEREIN ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND LIABILITIES, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR IN NEGLIGENCE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN LAW OR IN FACT, INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR USE, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL WARRANTOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied limited warranty lasts or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. Parts will be provided by our factory organization through an authorized service organization in your area listed in the yellow pages. If you wish further help or information concerning this limited warranty, contact: American Standard Inc. 2701 Wilma Rudolph Blvd. Clarksville, TN 37040 -1008 Attention: Manager, Product Service G W- 611 -4001 * This limited warranty is for residential usage of this equipment and not applicable when this equipment is used for a commercial application. A commercial use is any application where the end purchaser uses the product for other than personal, family or household purposes. 42 S Limited Warranty Heat Pump WCZ, WCY, WCX, WCC, WCD, WCH, WCM, WCP and WSC (Parts Only) Models Less Than 20 Tons for Commercial Use* This warranty is extended by American Standard Inc., to the original purchaser and to any succeeding owner of the real property to which the Heat Pump is originally affixed, and applies to products purchased and retained for use within the U.S.A. and Canada. There is no warranty against corrosion, erosion or deterioration. If any part of your Heat Pump fails because of a manufacturing defect within one year from the date of the original purchase, Warrantor will furnish without charge the required replacement part. In addition, if the sealed motor - compressor fails because of a manufacturing defect within the second through fifth year from the date of original purchase, Warrantor will furnish without charge the required replacement compressor. Warrantor's obligations and liabilities under this warranty are limited to furnishing F.O.B. Warrantor factory or warehouse replacement parts for Warrantor's products covered under this warranty. Warrantor shall not be obligated to pay for the cost of lost refrigerant. No liability shall attach to Warrantor until products have been paid for and then liability shall be limited solely to the purchase price of the equipment under warranty shown to be defective. THE WARRANTY AND LIABILITY SET FORTH HEREIN ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND LIABILITIES, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR IN NEGLIGENCE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN LAW OR IN FACT, INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR USE, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL WARRAN- TOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. American Standard Inc. 2701 Wilma Rudolph Blvd. Clarksville, TN 37040 -1008 Attention: Manager, Product Service GW- 604 -4800 * This warranty is for commercial usage of said equipment and not applicable when the equipment is used for a residential application. Commercial use is any application where the end purchaser uses the product for other than personal, family or household purposes. ACTIVITY NUMBER: M08 -239 DATE: 09 -23 -08 PROJECT NAME: RIVER POINT (SHELL & CORE) SITE ADDRESS: 18300 CASCADE AV X Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Letter # Response to Incomplete Letter # Revision # after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: Building Division LAN Public Works Complete Comments: Documents/routing slip.doc 2 -28 -02 • PERMIT COORD COPY � PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP n APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: �i! I odw c' Fire Prevention Structural DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Incomplete n TUES/THURS ROUTI G: Please Route Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DUE DATE: 09-5 -08 Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: No further Review Required DATE: DUE DATE: 10-23-08 Not Approved (attach comments) n DATE: Planning Division Permit Coordinator Not Applicable n n n Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: Bond Bond Company Name Bond Account Number Effective Date Expiration Date Cancel Date Impaired Date Bond Amount Received Date 3 DEVELOPERS INDEMNITY CO 4 25978C 05/21 /2002 Cancelled 01/01/1980 $12,000.00 06/03/2002 2 DEVELOPERS SURETY a INDEM CO 425978C 12/29/2000 05/21/2002 $6,000.00 08/28/2001 1 DEVELOPERS INS CO 425978C 06/05/199612/29 /2000 $6,000.00 Name Role Effective Date Expiration Date SLOAN, BART PARTNER /MEMBER i 01/01/1980 JONES, CLYDE PARTNER /MEMBER 01/01/1980 JONES, THERESA PARTNER /MEMBER 01/01/1980 SLOAN, LINDA PARTNER /MEMBER 01/01/1980 Untitled Page General /Specialty Contractor A business registered as a construction contractor with L&l to perform construction work within the scope of its specialty. A General or Specialty construction Contractor must maintain a surety bond or assignment of account and carry general liability insurance. Business and Licensing Information Name Phone Address Suite /Apt. City State Zip County Business Type Parent Company S B QUALITY AIR LLC 0000000000 4909 ORCA DR NE TACOMA WA 98422 PIERCE LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY UBI No. Status License No. License Type Effective Date Expiration Date Suspend Date Previous License Next License Associated License Specialty 1 Specialty 2 601703761 ACTIVE SBQUAAL044MA CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR 7/1/1996 6/29/2010 SBQUAAS088MM GENERAL UNUSED Business Owner Information Bond Information Insurance Information • • I Company I Policy I Effective I Expiration I Cancel 'Impaired' Page 1 of 2 Received https: // fortress .wa.gov /lni/bbip/Detail.aspx ?License= SBQUAAL044MA 10/06/2008 442 REGISTERED \ ARCHITEOT8 EC)I LINARDIC STATE OF WASHINGTON consultants: No NOTE: and REVISIONS changes shalt be made to the scope of work without prior approval of Tukwila Building Division. Revisions will require a new plan submittal may include additional plan review tees. FELL. c ' v Permit No. rev iew approval is subject to errors and omissicno. ,, J of construction documents does nct autiror.Zo halation of any adopted code or ordnance Ci c I ,t ,roved Field Copy and conditions is ianoviledzed: By l 'liar L \PAitit f.I afe• J 1 `.6 - City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION project title: PROPOSED PROJECT FOR: RIVERPOINT CORP CORP CENTER TUKWILA, W ► sheet title: SITE PLAN 1 city & owner revisions 10/4/07 no: revisions date: job no: sheet no: A - 1 40 draw: checked: STATISTICS: z r t" / • Y gam. r r r 5144.4. r 1Y 05444455. w r . r, r }s. r 4.4.44 4.4.44 A 4.5.5. r r �. it 4 4 • y .4.5444 w w 5.455.0 r r Rq r S 5.15.1441 r S 55.1.450 f r S ~Weft r r .11.4.1 . r r fwws r r t om • �1.. ....�,1....., \ • Ulai K TfP. ff \ ! I i C (k3. 111 1'005. EXr i ti .. Cr.M. tt C 53 C • , . 0 SITE AREA: 6.58 ACRES ZONE: C /CLI CONSTRUCTION TYPE: V B SPRINKLER BUILDING AREA: BLDG 1: 53,625 SF BLDG 2: 53,625 SF PARKING REQUIERED: 278 STALLS PARKING PROVIDED: 414 STALLS BUILDING AREA UNDER THIS PERMIT: 1ST FLOOR: 3,507 SF 2ND FLOOR; 12,480 SF TOTAL: 15,987 SF LI: C C C C C( C;CC IC ,Ep .. (.4.511 ■1 Coln. / CAMAM LEGAL: C 1 is C IC I C iG 1 r IT WA E:ElgrlE • L A T Et511 GTR4.SECEURt Pu BLDG. 1 Er CI CCICIC(CIC I CASCADE C' C _ J ! t WEST VALLEY HIGHWAY MN... .. r Eww..! M t wwwm w w away w w ammwr !• M wr y CiC CJC : CCC CIC € '; 1 AVENUE • r CICIC 44 SOUTH 4 I I I3LDGI 2 / Carr; C04. PdltK4T EP w (.f.w`r r r r 5.5) r r .44..0tl r r w.rl r r......-Y r r K..•wE M r 1+.m... w r 1155.4451 r r maw...► b wwMr58 p r Iswwii r r 14545.55 S ON w®.wyEy M S 414440.6 W 1'28'50" L 845.35 .�f ` 10 urun rlsEIEhl C C CC4:11( ; >tt 0 f)lir.cE0 CTxtcS �� C C C 14 I t C C ' G .I C I 1 I r e ' C , C III 1 1.•ww+1 M r 1+11nn•M H .► ..f or... rmsa.. r r 11444. 1 C t C ! G SITE ADDRESS: 18200 & 18300 CASCADE AVE S PARCEL NUMBER: 7888900170 SOUTHCENTER SOUTH INDUSTRIAL PARK POR LOTS 15 & 17 - BEG SW COR LOT 17 TH S 78-- 36--10 E 80 FT TH ALG CURVE TO RGT CENTER BEARING N 11-23-50 E RAD OF 50 FT ARC DISTANCE 78,54 FT THRU C/A OF 90- 00-00 TH N 11 -23 -50 E ALG A LN 30 FT E OF & PLW W LN LOT 17 DISTANCE OF 357 FT TO TPOB TH CONTG N 11- -23 -50 E ALG SD LN 291.25 FT TH ALG CURVE TO LFT RAD 110 FT THRU C/A OF 62 -57 -52 ARC DIST 120.83 FT TH N 11- 23-50 E ALG A LN 30 FT W OF & PLT W LN LOT 17 147.375 FT TO THE. TOP OF RGT BANK OF GREEN RIVER TH ALG SO TOP OF RGT BANK OF GREEN RIVER THE FOLD COURSES & DISTANCES - S 44 -29 -00 E 96.32 FT - S 59 -43 -00 E 98 FT S 72 -17-00 E 101 FT S 82- 08-00 E 100 FT N 78 -54 -00 E 99 FT N 68 -34 -00 E 99 FT N 73- 00-33 E 97.69 FT M/L TO W MGN OF SECONDARY ST HWY 2M TH LEAVING SD TOP OF RGT BANK OF GREEN RIVER ALG SD W MGN ON A CURVE TO RGT THE CENTER BEARING N 47- -3320 W RAD OF 543.14 FT ARC DIST OF 87.08 FT THRU C/A OF 09 -11 -11 TH S 51 -37-10 W 131.40 FT TH ALG CURVE TO LFT ON SD W MGN RAD OF 603.14 FT ARC DISTANCE OF 423.53 FT THRU C/A OF 40-14-00 TH S 11. 23-50 W 23.32 FT TH N 78-36-10 W 295 FT TO TPOB - AKA PHASE II OF CORPORATE PROPERTY INVESTORS BINDING SITE IMPROVEMENT PLAT RECORDING NO 8104210455 & CITY OF TUKWILA WRY LN SITE PLAN 1"=40' i IfGWORSIER V.E1 VICINITY MAP: 13 • Q \;; .7.2. 15 15 17 ■ 11 ti i i j j C. ` ' ' --- �. 4 - �, -- f / / / 1 C /` C � -• , ! , i C °'. . L� --- ., r I / i C a �^ --.. :„..,..,:4......40: �w `(I � '' :../...,,si,ts,' f I G / ' C i ` //{� `, C E J ., ., / 1 i j / 4/ C I' , C'• z� f ' C G.. r I r 5.4 511 i 54544440 54.01411 10 0 NNW. N 11'2$'54" E 147.37' III rr r r rk®. y r ;• ( J .. 7 J *. / r , f ' / * 2 Ji f ;� *' U o / l G) ) r rI C C • C .. C C -- r, C C C.. C C C G C C 4 C' i LI 0 City Of . okwil .!LV'J1.I..' 00k , A.PPR ()VIED , .i €11153 SEPARATE PERMIT REQUIRED FOR: D Mechanical e lectrical Plumbing "(Gas Piping City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION „\ icMi c ry iCE ODE COMP RECEIVED CITY OF TUKVVILA SEP 2 3 1008 PERMIT CENTER ti PIS~' App the of a 4909 Orca Dr. N.E. Tacoma, WA 98422 24 Hr. (206) 788 -7272 uality Air, L.L.C. Bart Sloan Owner / President Heating • Venting • Air Conditioning Installation • Service Mechanical Contractor SBQUAALO44MA Cell: (206) 779 -8144 Off: (253) 927 -6399 Fax: (253) 927 -6091 P . l cFl. . . Kh:I _v,,-, coif_ e . FM -4o. , A \ , f_ � 0 _T FQALA e 1 t p E l .s 9 t,,,A,„„,„ ______ _ _ . ________ _____ ..___________________ SYM A B C REVISION APPROVED DJS /DG /MB RDS DATE SYM REVISION Quality Air, L.L.C. Bart Sloan Owner / President 4909 Orca Dr. N.E. Tacoma, WA 98422 24 Hr. (206) 788 -7272 Heating • Venting • Air Conditioning Installation • Service ni \Lr\ \111 I HL. I J I. Mechanical Contractor SBQUAALO441v1A Cell: (206) 779 -8144 Off: (253) 927 -6399 Fax: (253) 927 -6091 A S ? Vi k y ,-A-a "c, A 6 oo c ' MACAO_ T - S QC� UY‘ !i, I re C,6\,\0(\ Li? 6 \.T Ai,- H e \ t t it . �` u ('s k_Ae C�zt1 Cl W�� C e C j Vv\ . S ©\'v O112 A .(L A a Iv\ co 4,6, 0 'n- \ o & ` v\-Q_ SQ__• G�'rl A 0'r\ 6-2Q v\-c.) ∎ 4 ` t k MDR- 239 UR. IN r 4909 Orca Dr. N.E. Tacoma, WA 98422 24 Hr. (206) 788 -7272 C . I .. '4 C��t�tlity Air, L.L.C. 1X4 FLOURESENT LIOGHT FIXTURE. 2X4 FLUORESCENT, LIGHT FIXTURE Heating • Venting • Air Conditioning Installation • Service FLUORESCENT L 'GHT FIXTURE W /BLACK EGGCRATE FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURE W41 SILVER PARABOLIC LENSES RETURN AIR GRILLE AIR SUPPLY SPEAKER SPRINKLER HEAD REVI VVED FOR -- CODE COMPLIANCE APPROV OCT o 3 2008 B �y Tukwila SHEET„„ • JOB NO2COS .� DWG. NO. Bart Sloan Owner / President Mechanical Contractor SBQUAALO44MA Cell: (206) 779 -8144 Off: (253) 927 -6399 Fax: (253) 927 -6091 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA SPP 2 31008 PERMIT CENTER s tiliffni - W onmi ImminifiSS Immo rom sou I I 'I 4 ' 1 - 1 II II III ri 111 im 1 ham 11 1 1 1 11 No inorplio. Liplip 11 Ipimm mop, ploi...maillin mon """ill I 11111111111111111111.111 111 1111111111 1ST FLOOR SCALE: 1 /8 " =1' -0" .ST EXT'G CLG DAY_IGHT SWITCHING AREA SEE NOTE 3 o 5 1 Coc\ A rOh WALL LEGEND NEW WALLS EXISTING WALLS OR WINDOWS TO BE REMOVED EXIST. WALLS TO REMAIN 2X4 SUSPENDED CEILING GRID, TYP 2X4 FLUORESCENT TROFFER, TYP 2X4 SUSPENDED CEILING TILE, TYP )COPE, 0 \A1 09,X. A c�. c,l i-I-S•.1.5. rfc -) 4,9r- C:.Cono''inl 7-.Pre3 1 L.) 0 \I i P \ \( 0.Q.11 u n71 5r � � ' t : � ; ,- [ \ 2 0 6 y \.,, ,r oUi7! Af\ ( i.rah=? CQ ( { (..r) In (? (2.7\ '3 '. r° ._.. ,2 \\ _ 1' ),e2[iit ..,.__ _ _..w..... _ _.__ �,✓ rte, f2 c),e, kc. C?c -kc RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA SEP 2 3 2008 PERMIT CENTER 4909 Orca Dr. N.E. Tacorna, WA 98422 24 Hr. (206) 788 -7272 NOT PUBLISHED. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. THE ABO\ AND SPECIFICATIONS AND IDEAS DESIGNS AND AR REPRESENT TFIEREBY ARE AND SHALL REMAIN TH OF THE ARCHITECT. NO PART THEREOF SHALL DE f COPIED. ADAPTED. DISCLOSED OR DISTRIBUTED SOLD. PUBLISHED. OR OTHERWISE USED WITI - IOU] WRITTEN CONSENT OF AND APPROPRIATE COMPENSP ARCHITECT. VISUAL CONTACT WITH THE ABOVE DR SPECIFICATIONS SHALL CONSTITUTE CONCLUSIVE E ACCEPTANCE OF THESE RESTRICTIONS 4423 7 no: Quality Air, L.L.C. Bad Sloan Owner / President Fleeting • Venting • Air Conditioning Installation • Service REGISTERED ARCHITECTS EDI LINARDIC STATE OF WASHINGTON consultants: project title: PROPOSED PROJECT RIVERPOINT CORP CORP CENTER Mo823ff TUKWILA, WA sheet title: REFLECTED CEILING I T/P ICA R & u I Yr ( (L P 1 G?'1\J;" ! GOt•v);'k -z.e f T- "o.4 o6, t ,0it)f? tAQc & A- P\Qru tvi ( Y\ o e.Oq7er orr, Li -e5e4S T� Q,C& O r�.c: ✓, 2ivin I ..��f J revisions Mechanical Contractor SBQUAALO44MA Cell: (206) 779 -8144 Off: (253) 927 - 6399 Fax: (253) 927 -6091 job no: sheet r1.1 P 3oF 111■••••■••••.••••• •%••• •••••••••••••• •mi woroRMINIPM....1 ii.ffINCTO k ,STon C) .VeLm.= P.m ••■•••■•••■•*.■••,■• SECOND FLOOR C 0 • 7.5 - Ton ■'...."......°.. .........__________________.,,__„....._......,._ --- iiiiiiiiiiirffilitifiritiii - TATiltitillifilliiiiirilliiiiiiiMiliiiii l IIIIIImmellirllinilligiriololrmilimallelmmosomm ionmi onsgroliontiemummisimagiumorilionorimemuntinuriumoll Ann Plaiiimammummtalir4eraiilirammirt immuorgerail iiiiiIii itottlitiiirolinij miliortimilmuounna remiltimailliiit !‘171111111/CHIL62111L1ErailalleIVINIIIMII 1111111111111,11111figrAl21111 1111111111111111111i1111 11111.:111111111 101E111-a11811511111111fMINIIIMICIL-,11 110111L10111111114E11=1 „..,h,.#.\!!!!!!!,!,..i,rrr!E;o.:::: l 'T wull ..-....i. , .-04-5.. ... .- - .1.. .1.,; 1:,:i.4.:4.i. .:::,....4:.a.:. ..v:4‘‘,.... :: : : 3 1 t 4.4 H; :: J . :4 :: ; ; ": 0 ' .:c.lfs.;:gPA:S.:ft.:;:;;:;14Si4R..:4511k:47..v..8:i,ii'i4.;A:A..4<AZ.7%;4.rn",.444k:4**.y..1...b.,c.I'74,04::razrAt',.:;•::1;. , .R. ,./ i., 11 .1 - .4 .. f . i ; . 1 6...i 4 :,5r1..weigtt A .1 1 ." : .:6% ;: .1?. y ll i. ,/,',1 1 4 • : •! , !_; : i v a ;:1 , 1;. , *2? , ‘• -4 !: . : , ;4: .14:1..C: --1.0%1,-..,4. ;i1;:i4: . I • „.•::. at . .. " ..". ''"! AW ',Ade. ",•I de / As,, 01111111 1110111111W0 t 1111111111111111 0 V W rU NORTH elf\ gootil \D v() co' le -for an-a.aniu*...••••,.• 5 To I ••••••••••■■•••••! 917.1•■••■ AN! &ion eeek••••• A 6A Ca(.06, y.\ 6;e_ . (iv ef. CAAivek GOt S (.X 9 t) \& V 'f\ \c/Oc 0 V') tiOew 3c1 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED OCT 03 2008 s•••••••••■•••••• .•■•••••121. City Of Tukwila BUILD 11,0_12IVISIQB RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWI LA SEP 2 3 2008 PERMIT CENTER 4909 Orca Dr. N.E. Tacoma, WA 98422 24 Hr. (206) 788-7272 Qudity&LJUEL Bart Sloan Owner / President Heating • Venting • Air Conditioning Installation • Service P. 4oF Mechanical Contractor SBQUAAL044MA Cell: (206) 779-8144 Off: (253) 927-6399 Fax: (253) 927-6091 ; 4423 EDI S TATE IR A E Z I tYT E E= LINARDIC OF WASHINGTON consultants: project title: PROPOSED PROJECT RIVERPOINT CORP CORP CENTER TUKWILA, WA sheet title: REFLECTED CEILING - 1.,' qt I? \Now ON) fZe4uro 010,fldrY1 Ore f A A 6 7-exk&-64 ;Art oileti_i_Paei stioKeteveckor eildtivard al 12ilti AAA. roo.c4r..) f lintIL______ i-ze 0 c Qrx,- Ae)t) 0.11i no: revisions job no:200e 34— _ .2. checked: 1 •4.• 111■••••■••••.••••• •%••• •••••••••••••• •mi woroRMINIPM....1 ii.ffINCTO k ,STon C) .VeLm.= P.m ••■•••■•••■•*.■••,■• SECOND FLOOR C 0 • 7.5 - Ton ■'...."......°.. .........__________________.,,__„....._......,._ --- iiiiiiiiiiirffilitifiritiii - TATiltitillifilliiiiirilliiiiiiiMiliiiii l IIIIIImmellirllinilligiriololrmilimallelmmosomm ionmi onsgroliontiemummisimagiumorilionorimemuntinuriumoll Ann Plaiiimammummtalir4eraiilirammirt immuorgerail iiiiiIii itottlitiiirolinij miliortimilmuounna remiltimailliiit !‘171111111/CHIL62111L1ErailalleIVINIIIMII 1111111111111,11111figrAl21111 1111111111111111111i1111 11111.:111111111 101E111-a11811511111111fMINIIIMICIL-,11 110111L10111111114E11=1 „..,h,.#.\!!!!!!!,!,..i,rrr!E;o.:::: l 'T wull ..-....i. , .-04-5.. ... .- - .1.. .1.,; 1:,:i.4.:4.i. .:::,....4:.a.:. ..v:4‘‘,.... :: : : 3 1 t 4.4 H; :: J . :4 :: ; ; ": 0 ' .:c.lfs.;:gPA:S.:ft.:;:;;:;14Si4R..:4511k:47..v..8:i,ii'i4.;A:A..4<AZ.7%;4.rn",.444k:4**.y..1...b.,c.I'74,04::razrAt',.:;•::1;. , .R. ,./ i., 11 .1 - .4 .. f . i ; . 1 6...i 4 :,5r1..weigtt A .1 1 ." : .:6% ;: .1?. y ll i. ,/,',1 1 4 • : •! , !_; : i v a ;:1 , 1;. , *2? , ‘• -4 !: . : , ;4: .14:1..C: --1.0%1,-..,4. ;i1;:i4: . I • „.•::. at . .. " ..". ''"! AW ',Ade. ",•I de / As,, 01111111 1110111111W0 t 1111111111111111 0 V W rU NORTH elf\ gootil \D v() co' le -for an-a.aniu*...••••,.• 5 To I ••••••••••■■•••••! 917.1•■••■ AN! &ion eeek••••• A 6A Ca(.06, y.\ 6;e_ . (iv ef. CAAivek GOt S (.X 9 t) \& V 'f\ \c/Oc 0 V') tiOew 3c1 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED OCT 03 2008 s•••••••••■•••••• .•■•••••121. City Of Tukwila BUILD 11,0_12IVISIQB RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWI LA SEP 2 3 2008 PERMIT CENTER 4909 Orca Dr. N.E. Tacoma, WA 98422 24 Hr. (206) 788-7272 Qudity&LJUEL Bart Sloan Owner / President Heating • Venting • Air Conditioning Installation • Service P. 4oF Mechanical Contractor SBQUAAL044MA Cell: (206) 779-8144 Off: (253) 927-6399 Fax: (253) 927-6091 ; To n 2ND FLOOR' SCALE: 1 /8"= 1 —0" 0 5' 10' 20' 30' A -1 7P /\ 7.S Ton /E;\ 5Tor 7.5Ton , I I • • , • 11111 A 1111 11: vim I 111 1111 ll; Mil 1 % ;; U.! 111 I . 1111 za!1:,,,o,6 1:11:1111 11.57111_1_11.111.11: 1_1111_..11141111 I 111:1111:1211112; 211111.11.11 121111111111°1 1111 1? 111111111111111TI11111111 1111111 1111111111!„: 11!111 'liii 111 " 1 111! I In 911 11 111 111111 1 I 119 111 I 114,. 1111.1111111.1111 lin""C 111111 1116111 1 111111111 111 11111111111111111111111IPPIllhilli7111 !g21: • I Ell 1;!. 11 " 111111 III I III II 111 11111 I II !II:11111111 111111111 I 11111111 II 061_ It In 111111 - • !il 11 II EN mak A mi!, /821i Mal I I I ; 1"\P CAL 1 ' • I Tar, • 11.1111111 "116 [111111 111111111111:11111111111111114!1111111111111111 11111111111111,..„;1111111111:1111111:111111„11111111111111111 I Mil Nil MAE • I I II II III 1 11„ —17 1-1;171111-1r7-18 gommirm: 11 i 1 ,‘._. 111111' : • • • • „ IN_ E171 1111111 I ' III 11 1111_N_N II , .:". ......_....._........„ ,._............_,_ . 1 ,.." , . , . I 1 i • . '.... i i 11 ,, - ,. . - - 1 . . . . - - , i l l - - 1- , , ., . ,, t. ,.. . . .. t . .. ,. , ir i T I ■ . i .../ . ,. . . :: I . , 1 ! i H LOH; I --,,,J,,, , t..,,...,...:„'„,„ ; ',,..;;.,,,,::::'• 1 i i 1 ! 1 ! 1 1 I I i I I i . 2X4 SUSPENDED CEILING GRID, rip 2X4 FLUORESCENT TROFFER, TYP 2X4 SUSPENDED CEILING TILE, rip SCOPE cF W AAA PaCKA-65tG: r121 \--(S (f CO 00 k • LC I ICVN [\ L&e 1 —54c ■,,eX i--k- LJC Sfn ih:)LtrIA-ea, ofA s ot ReAll rt Pteikayvtc, $ ),.. c\01 , f1‘)Ve -1-1_ Ap 0.9f Co 0,* E.gro NAVLATit J11:11441S41.140 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA SEP 2 3 2008 PERMIT CENTER P 5 of 4909 Orca Dr. N,E. Tacoma, WA 98422 24 Hr. (206) 788-7272 4423 FtEOISTEF1ED ARCHITECTS EDI LINAFIDIC STATE OF WASHINGTON consultants: REVIEVVtD FOR :ODE COMPLIANCE APPROVE 0 3 2003 City Of Tukwila • WINO DIVISION PROPOSED PROJECT RIVERPOINT CORP CORP CENTER TUKWILA, WA sheet title: REFLECTED CEILING project title: no: job Heating • Venting • Air Conditioning Installation • Service MOB--237 TYPICAL <.)t.) U t. • Bart Sloan Owner / President (- iiz,zer-lx-c,v cye ok revisions 2 , sheet Mechanical Contractor SBQUAAL044MA Cell: (206) 779:8144 Off: (253) 927-6399 Fax: (253) 927-6091 1SA o•nA tA re (.0i 6tA \ One" M.3 c'e REVISION APPROVED APPROVED KEG `) eJu�Q�u P s).Q`4Vlvlvh �o� C9f1 o .kacq61, 0,41:% QQ? $ I\ . �e h�, , r151 LOT\ ( OiNckKa)Ca 1 0 E1+21 UISCG M \Q&k rt (Vi ‘k s V El PaorrAya t,..iik itcoltcp c 1 : APPROVED BY ACCEPTAB THIS DESIGN AND /OR SPECIFICATION IS APPROVED DEPT. DATE AAA co f 1.ev'\ c ' ;, c n t ( \Atev Air Ol t1t.‘er l (.0A - '.0 c-o1 \JQrJl._ c954-T-4:.‘ 6.014 L A 4c' C f'i 0; t:'? ROOF PLA A\ 1 CAL 4909 Orca Dr. N.E. Tacoma, WA 98422 24 Hr. (206) 788 -7272 \ NoRTh Witt Mechanical Contractor u�lzt Azr L.L.C• SBQUAAL044MA Bart Sloan Owner / President Heating • Venting • Air Conditioning Installation • Service LAST REVISION Cell: (206) 779 -8144 Off: (253) 927 -6399 Fax: (253) 927 -6091 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA SEP 2 3 2000 PERMIT CENTER VILAL Ali e kln"dt-Set ues_elloots__ _Colli4(15 50.0,4 (-70-2, P\.E..1Ar2111 prop __ A CIALIi_-v a'iR. Vikeitavv\,, r+ A .1.ec\ co.\ CYk5 c.,0 e‘rtgc ....... _ ..., _ ..., _ ' - 1 ..■ ..0•11 REVISION ROOF PLA SCALE: 1 /8' =1 -0" n 1t Ne cor. APPROVED REVISION APPROVED ACCEPTAB I L 1 TY THIS DESIGN AND/OR SPECIFICATION IS APPROVED DEPT. APPROVED. BY SCOPE C--) \N u AA A Co tv),,ey‘si vto tliA;k 0c 7 70 D . 0 r A e_a_rj Pt\ r- t-40 -1C\r\\Q k e co..-Vea or L\11 ‘Se.A; vi \ / rJ C VQ( C91 54 c) +C) <:\ S VECHAN I CAL MAST 4909 Oro° Dr. N.E. Tacoma, WA 98422 24 Hr. (206) 788-7272 ROOF PLA\ s Bad Sloan Owner / President Heating • Venting • Air Conditioning Installation • Service LAST REVISION Mechanical Contractor SBQUAAL044MA Cell: (206) 779-8144 OM (253) 927-6399 Fax: (253) 927-6091 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA SEP 2 3 ?008 PERMIT CENTER 5 14 A P 70E7